summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/37647.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to '37647.txt')
-rw-r--r--37647.txt8365
1 files changed, 8365 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/37647.txt b/37647.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eb9a0b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37647.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8365 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Adventures of a Country Boy at a Country
+Fair, by James Otis
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: The Adventures of a Country Boy at a Country Fair
+
+
+Author: James Otis
+
+
+
+Release Date: October 6, 2011 [eBook #37647]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII)
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ADVENTURES OF A COUNTRY BOY AT
+A COUNTRY FAIR***
+
+
+E-text prepared by Juliet Sutherland, Matthew Wheaton, and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team (http://www.pgdp.net)
+
+
+
+Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this
+ file which includes the original illustrations.
+ See 37647-h.htm or 37647-h.zip:
+ (http://www.gutenberg.org/files/37647/37647-h/37647-h.htm)
+ or
+ (http://www.gutenberg.org/files/37647/37647-h.zip)
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: In an instant Sam was off at full speed, crying, "Stop
+thief!" at the full strength of his lungs.]
+
+
+THE ADVENTURES OF A COUNTRY BOY AT A COUNTRY FAIR
+
+by
+
+James Otis
+
+Author of Toby Tyler Etc.
+
+Illustrated
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Boston
+Charles E. Brown & Co.
+
+Copyright, 1893,
+By Charles E. Brown & Co.
+
+S. J. Parkhill & Co., Printers
+Boston
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+
+ CHAPTER.
+ I.--A Young Fakir
+ II.--An Old Fakir
+ III.--A Friend
+ IV.--Uncle Nathan
+ V.--The Fair
+ VI.--A Clue
+ VII.--The Clerk
+ VIII.--The Jewelry Fakir
+ IX.--A Brave Rescue
+ X.--An Encounter
+ XI.--Long Jim
+ XII.--A Discovery
+ XIII.--Amateur Detectives
+ XIV.--The Rendezvous
+ XV.--Sam's Adventures
+ XVI.--Missing
+ XVII.--A Terrible Night
+ XVIII.--A Narrow Escape
+ XIX.--The Arrest
+ XX.--A Proposition
+ XXI.--With the Burglars
+ XXII.--A Disaster
+ XXIII.--A Second Arrest
+ XXIV.--A Third Arrest
+ XXV.--On Bail
+ XXVI.--The Fakirs' Party
+ XXVII.--In Hiding
+ XXVIII.--A Failure
+ XXIX.--The Testimonial
+ XXX.--The Trial
+ XXXI.--An Arrival
+ XXXII.--In Conclusion
+
+
+
+
+_THE ADVENTURES OF A COUNTRY BOY AT A COUNTRY FAIR._
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+_A YOUNG FAKIR._
+
+
+"I'm going to try it. Deacon Jones says I can have the right to run both
+things for ten dollars, and Uncle Nathan is going to lend me money
+enough to get the stock."
+
+"What scheme have you got in your head now, Teddy Hargreaves?" and Mrs.
+Fernald looked over her spectacles at the son of her widowed sister, who
+was literally breathless in his excitement.
+
+"I'm going to run a cane an' knife board at the Peach Bottom fair, and
+try to make money enough to pay the debt mother owes on the place."
+
+"You're crazy--mad as a March hare! The idea of a child like you setting
+yourself up to earn three or four hundred dollars, when your father
+worked all his life and couldn't get so much together."
+
+Mrs. Fernald really appeared to be angry, and she really believed there
+was good cause why she should lose her temper. The thought that little
+Teddy--a "whiflet" she called him--should set up his opinion in such
+matters against his elders, and attempt to earn in one season an amount
+which Seth Hargreaves had never been able to repay during his thirty-six
+years of life, was so preposterous that the good lady looked upon the
+boy's assertion as positive proof that he was not only ready but willing
+to "fly in the face of Providence."
+
+"I shall try it all the same," Teddy replied in a most provokingly
+matter-of-fact tone, "an' I'm going down to see Uncle Nathan this very
+minute."
+
+"Very well, and I consider it my bounden duty to advise your mother to
+keep you in the house until the fair is ended," Aunt Sarah said, as she
+took from its peg the well-worn gingham sun-bonnet.
+
+Teddy had no desire to prolong the conversation, which had been begun
+simply because his aunt insisted on knowing where he had been, but
+hurried away from the gate on which he had been swinging while Mrs.
+Fernald questioned him, as if fearful lest she might try to detain him
+until the matter could be settled according to her own ideas of
+propriety.
+
+"I can have the right to run what I want to, every day the fair lasts,
+for ten dollars, an' now, if you lend me fifteen, I'll be all right,"
+the boy cried as he burst into Nathan Hargreaves' store, just as the old
+gentleman was adding a trifle more sand to the sugar, in order to
+compensate for what might possibly have been spilled by the careless
+clerk.
+
+"Oh, it's fixed, eh? And you're really goin' to turn fakir?" Uncle
+Nathan asked, wrinkling his face into the semblance of a laugh, but
+remaining silent, as if fearing to waste even such a cheap thing as
+mirth.
+
+"What's a fakir?"
+
+"A man, or a boy, for that matter, who goes out to sell things as you
+count on doin', if I'm fool enough to let you throw away fifteen good
+dollars of mine."
+
+"But you promised to lend me the money."
+
+"An' I'm going to do it; but that don't make me any less a fool jest
+because I'm holdin' to my word. Tell me what you count on doin', an'
+then we'll come down to the business end of the scheme."
+
+"I'll pay the ten dollars I've got to Deacon Jones for the right to run
+the games, an' with what you lend me I'm goin' to Waterville an' buy a
+whole lot of knives an' canes. There's a storekeeper over there who
+promises to sell that kind of goods for less than they cost him."
+
+"An' he's lyin' when he says it. People don't do business for the fun of
+it; but that's neither here nor there so far as our trade is concerned.
+I'm goin' to give you the fifteen dollars now--it's a power of money for
+a boy of your size, Teddy--, an' if you make anything, as I allow you
+will, I'm to have eighteen dollars back; don't forget that part of the
+trade."
+
+"I'll stand to what I agreed, Uncle Nathan, and you shall be paid the
+very day the fair closes."
+
+"Here it is," and with a sigh which was almost a groan Uncle Nathan took
+from a fat calfskin wallet three five-dollar bills, adding, as he handed
+them to Teddy: "Be careful of it, my boy, for I'm puttin' almost too
+much confidence in a child of your size, an' nobody knows how distressed
+I'd be if anything happened to prevent your paying it back."
+
+Teddy placed the money carefully in the inside pocket of his vest, and,
+after promising for at least the hundredth time that it should be repaid
+by the close of the following week, hurried home confident in the belief
+that he was on an extremely short road to wealth.
+
+Mrs. Hargreaves was by no means as sanguine as her son concerning the
+success of the scheme, and actually appeared frightened when Teddy
+showed her the money he had received from his Uncle Nathan, who was
+reputed to be the "closest-fisted" merchant to be found within a day's
+ride of Peach Bottom Run.
+
+"If you should lose it, Teddy, and be unable to pay him back at the
+exact time you promised, it would be the undoing of us, for we could
+never expect to get another dollar. I know he is not generous, but have
+always believed that if we should be in yet more straitened
+circumstances he would give us some assistance. He has neither charity
+nor mercy for any one who does not pay a little more than his just
+debts--"
+
+"But I shall give back every cent of this, mother, so don't look as if
+you were in such distress. I want to go to Waterville to buy my stock in
+the morning, an' am counting on walking. It's only seven miles, an' I'll
+save fifty cents by traveling on shanks' mare."
+
+"I will have breakfast ready by four o'clock; but you must come back on
+the stage, Teddy."
+
+"Yes, if I feel very tired; but I don't know of any easier way to earn a
+dollar than by walking both ways."
+
+The young "fakir" believed he knew exactly what kind and amount of stock
+he wished to purchase on the following day, therefore he had no
+preparations to make for the journey save to get his limbs in the best
+possible condition for the tramp by retiring very early, in order to
+"scoop in" plenty of sleep.
+
+The thought of the success which should attend him in his new venture
+kept his eyes open a long while after getting into bed, and when he
+finally succeeded in crossing over to the land of Nod, dreams of the
+fortune to be made during the coming week visited his brain, and
+remained there until his mother's voice summoned him to breakfast.
+
+The sun had not yet come up from behind the hills when he was trudging
+sturdily along over the dusty road, carrying a generous luncheon tied in
+a snowy-white napkin, and with his money secured by many pins in the
+lining of his cap.
+
+"Be careful not to lose it, for your Uncle Nathan would never forgive
+you," his mother had said, and he cried cheerily, as he walked swiftly
+down the lane to the highway:
+
+"There's no fear of anything like that happening; the bills can't get
+away without my knowing it so long as they stay here," and Teddy pulled
+his cap yet more closely down on his head.
+
+In a trifle more than two hours he was at Waterville, wondering why the
+stores were not open, no matter how early it was, when such an important
+customer as himself came to town.
+
+Since the merchants were evidently ignorant of his arrival, as was
+evidenced by the fact that their places of business yet remained closed,
+there was no more profitable occupation for him than to eat a second
+breakfast, which he proceeded to do, using a hand-truck on the
+depot-platform as a seat.
+
+The train which left New York on the evening before had arrived some
+time previous, and the station was temporarily deserted by all save a
+boy of about Teddy's age, who was walking to and fro in an aimless
+manner.
+
+By the time the young "fakir" had finished his second biscuit he noticed
+that the stranger was watching him narrowly, and, holding forth the
+napkin with its generous store, he asked:
+
+"Have one?"
+
+"I don't care if I do," said the boy, carelessly, and he continued:
+
+"I reckon you live 'round here?"
+
+"No, I jest come up from Peach Bottom Run, an' am waiting for the stores
+to be opened."
+
+"Why, you're from the same place where the fair is goin' to be held."
+
+"No; I live at the Run, an' the fair is over to Peach Bottom, most five
+miles from my house. Are you goin' there?"
+
+"I should reckon I was. Why, I'm goin' to help run it."
+
+"You are?" and Teddy's mouth opened wide in astonishment.
+
+"Yes, sir-ree, an' you fellers will be jest about crazy when I tell you
+what I've come to do."
+
+"Don't flash it upon us too quick, for we wanter kind of keep our wits
+about us till the fun is over."
+
+The tone of sarcasm in Teddy's voice appeared to nettle the stranger.
+
+"I've come down here to give away a steamboat what's worth five hundred
+dollars."
+
+"Then there ain't any need for you to go any farther, 'cause I'm willin'
+to take it now."
+
+"If you won't be so smart I'll tell you about it," was the dignified
+reply. "There's a firm out in Detroit what's goin' to do that very thing
+to the feller that can guess how much she weighs, an' I've been hired to
+help the man who is comin' down to Peach Bottom to show off a lot of
+boats."
+
+"What are you goin' to do?" and now Teddy was interested.
+
+"Row around in the creek while he looks out for the stuff in the fair.
+It won't be any more'n fun, an' if you'll come over I'll take you out."
+
+"I don't s'pose you could help me guess how much the steamer weighs,
+could you?"
+
+"There ain't anybody as can do that, 'cause you see she ain't built yet;
+but you can find out all about it by lookin' on the fair grounds for the
+circulars what the Davis Boat and Oar Company of Detroit will throw
+around, an' if there's somethin' else you wanter know jest ask for Sam
+Balderston; all the folks will know me before I've been there very
+long."
+
+"I'm going to work at the fair myself," Teddy replied, and then, in
+response to his new friend's questions, he gave him all the particulars
+of his proposed venture.
+
+"I reckon you'll get along all right, an' come out way ahead, if some of
+these smart fakirs don't try to get the best of you. Say, why can't I go
+to your house, an' stay till it's time to go over to the fair? I'll pay
+my way."
+
+"If mother's willin', I'd like to have you, an' I don't believe she'll
+care. Now, I've got to buy my stuff. Where'll I meet you afterward?"
+
+"I'm goin' with you," Sam said, in a matter-of-fact tone. "I know a good
+deal about such things, an' won't see you cheated."
+
+Teddy hardly thought he was in need of any assistance; but since he did
+not want to offend this fellow who was concerned in giving away a
+steamboat, he could not well refuse, therefore the two started up the
+street together.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+_AN OLD FAKIR._
+
+
+Sam had very much advice to give during the short walk, and while the
+greater portion of it was worthless, there were bits which might be of
+value to the young "fakir."
+
+"Don't buy anything till you have seen all there is in town, an' then
+you'll know which is the cheapest," Sam repeated several times, with an
+air of wisdom, and Teddy believed this to be a good idea.
+
+With this object in view the two boys walked from store to store,
+examining that particular quality of canes and knives which Teddy
+thought would be best suited to his purpose, and Sam had no hesitation
+in criticising the goods boldly, until more than one of the clerks lost
+his temper entirely and refused to show the full stock.
+
+"If you go on this way, Sam, we won't get the business done to day, an'
+I want to send the stuff down in the stage, which leaves here at three
+o'clock."
+
+"There'll be plenty of time for that; I know what I'm about. Now, if you
+had sent your money to me, I'd got you a dandy lot in New York for
+almost nothing."
+
+"Seein's how I didn't even know your name till a couple of hours ago,
+there wasn't much chance for me to do that, an' I guess I'll make out
+well enough here if you don't keep on raisin' a fuss with the clerks."
+
+"I won't so much as yip ag'in, if that's the way you look at it. The
+question is, which store you're goin' to buy from?"
+
+"There's a place near the depot that wasn't open when we came past.
+Let's go there, an' then I'll make up my mind."
+
+Sam, feeling a trifle injured because his advice had not been fully
+appreciated, said nothing more until they were near the station, and
+then, seeing a train approaching, he proposed that they stop for a few
+minutes.
+
+"Jest as likely as not there'll be people on it whom I know goin' to the
+fair, an' you want to get acquainted with all the fakirs, so's they'll
+help you along now an' then."
+
+"The stage goes at three."
+
+"An' it ain't more'n ten now. Come on!" Sam cried, triumphantly, as he
+motioned for Teddy to come nearer.
+
+Sam had already quickened his pace, and Teddy was forced to follow, or
+injure the feelings of one whom he believed held a responsible position
+in the Peach Bottom exhibition. Among the passengers alighting from the
+train as the boys arrived was a man who carried a large package
+enveloped in green cloth, and Sam whispered, excitedly:
+
+"I'll bet that's an old fakir, and if he is we want to let him know who
+we are."
+
+Teddy failed to understand exactly why this was necessary; but his
+companion seemed so positive on the point that he remained silent.
+
+This particular passenger appeared to have plenty of time at his
+disposal. He placed his package at one end of the platform, lighted a
+pipe, and then walked to and fro as the remainder of the travelers
+dispersed.
+
+"You foller me, an' we'll find out who he is," Sam whispered, when he
+thought a fitting opportunity had come, and then advanced boldly toward
+the stranger. "Goin' to the fair?" he asked.
+
+"Yes; what of it?"
+
+"Nothin', only I s'pose you know you've got to take another train here."
+
+"If I didn't why would I be loafin' around this dead place?"
+
+"I jest spoke of it 'cause this feller an' I are goin' there, too," and
+Sam waved his hand in the direction where Teddy was standing.
+
+"I s'pose there'll be other boys besides you at the fair, eh?"
+
+"But we belong to it. I'm to give a steamboat away, an' he's goin' to
+run a cane an' knife board. We're waiting here to buy the stock."
+
+[Illustration: THE THREE NOTES WERE HANDED TO THE GENEROUS STRANGER.]
+
+"Oh, you are, eh?" and now the man appeared to be interested. "I reckon
+you're goin' to spend as much as a dollar?"
+
+"One? Why, he's got fifteen, an' the whole of it will be spent before
+the stage leaves. We know something about the business an' don't count
+on gettin' an outfit for nothing."
+
+"I thought you was a fakir," the man said, in a more friendly tone, as,
+unobserved by the worldly-wise Sam, he made a peculiar gesture to a
+stranger immediately in the rear.
+
+"That's what I am," was the proud reply, "an' I'll make things hum over
+at Peach Bottom before I leave the town. You see I thought I'd speak to
+you, 'cause all of us fellers should know each other."
+
+"You're right, an' it's mighty lucky you did strike up an acquaintance,
+for I can give you a big lift. I've helped many a boy into the business
+when they had money enough to help themselves."
+
+The last dozen words were spoken in a loud tone, as if for the benefit
+of the stranger in the rear; but instead of waiting to hear more the
+latter turned abruptly and walked toward the package with a green
+covering at the end of the platform.
+
+"I knew we oughter talk with you."
+
+"Did you count on buying your stuff in this one-horse town?" the man
+asked as Teddy approached, and the latter replied:
+
+"There wasn't any other place I could go to, 'cause it costs too much
+for a ticket to New York."
+
+"How big a stock do you want?"
+
+"All I can get for fifteen dollars. Don't you think that will be
+enough?"
+
+"It depends," the stranger replied, reflectively. "If you buy the goods
+here you'll have to pay such a big price that it won't be much of a
+pile. Now, if--I've got the very thing in mind! You'll remember the day
+you saw me if my plan works. I know a fakir here who has a fine layout
+that he wants to sell. You can get fifty dollars' worth of stuff
+for--well, he asks twenty; but I'll say you are friends of mine, an' the
+chances are you can make a trade."
+
+"That would be a regular snap!" Sam cried, and Teddy's eyes glistened at
+the thought of thus procuring a full outfit so cheaply.
+
+"I'll do what I can for you," the man said, in a patronizing tone. "At
+any rate, I'll make him come down in his price, and if there's any
+balance it can be paid after the fair has been opened long enough for
+you to take in some money."
+
+"If business is good, I'm willing to do what is right," Teddy replied;
+"but I must pay Uncle Nathan first."
+
+"How much do you owe him?"
+
+"Fifteen dollars."
+
+"Why, bless my soul, it'll be a pretty poor fair if you can't make five
+times that amount in the first two days."
+
+"Where can we see the man?" Sam asked, eager that his wonderfully good
+trade should be consummated at the earliest possible opportunity.
+
+"I don't know; but he's somewhere in the town. Give me your cash, an'
+I'll hunt him up inside of half an hour. The stuff is right here in the
+baggage-room, and you can ship it on the stage without any trouble."
+
+Just for an instant Teddy hesitated to part with what seemed to him like
+an enormous amount of money; but then came the thought that an old fakir
+would not wrong a young one--and he considered himself such. After some
+little difficulty he succeeded in extracting all the pins, and the three
+notes were handed to the generous stranger almost at the same moment
+that the green-covered package disappeared from the edge of the platform
+simultaneously with the departure of the second stranger.
+
+"Wait right here for me," the man said, as he put the money in his
+pocket. "I've got too much work to do to spend any very great amount of
+time hunting you fellows up in case you don't stay in one place."
+
+After thus cautioning them, the old fakir walked slowly away, and Sam
+said:
+
+"It was lucky you fell in with me, Teddy, for I know how these things
+are worked, an' can give you a good many pointers before the fair is
+over. Why, you'll have a first-class outfit for about half what it's
+worth."
+
+"Yes, it's a good chance; but I can't see why he didn't take us with him
+if he was in a hurry, an' then he wouldn't have had to come back."
+
+"He's got to do that anyway, for his stuff is here," Sam replied,
+pointing toward where he had last seen the man's package; but it was no
+longer there. "I guess the baggage-master has taken it in," he added;
+"but you needn't be afraid of losin' your money while I'm with you."
+
+Then Sam occupied his companion's attention by telling of his many
+alleged wonderful exploits, and an hour passed before his story was
+concluded.
+
+In the meantime one train had arrived and departed; another was on the
+point of leaving the depot, bound for Peach Bottom, when Teddy cried as
+he leaped to his feet:
+
+"See! I'm certain that's the man who has got my money!"
+
+"Where?"
+
+"On the platform of the front car!"
+
+Before he could say anything more the train steamed out, leaving the
+would-be young fakir staring at it in distress and consternation.
+
+"Of course it wasn't him," Sam said, confidently, when the last car
+had disappeared from view. "The stuff he was goin'to buy for you is here
+in the baggage-room, 'cause he said so, an' we'll see him before long."
+
+[Illustration: "See! I'm certain that's the man who has got my money."]
+
+Teddy's suspicions had been aroused, and he was not easily quieted. The
+thought that it was possible he might have lost the money loaned him by
+Uncle Nathan was sufficient to cause the liveliest fear, and he said,
+decidedly:
+
+"I'm going to know where that man's baggage went to."
+
+"How'll you find out?"
+
+"Ask the baggage-master."
+
+"Don't make a fool of yourself. It would be nice for an old fakir like
+that man to know you thought he'd steal your money."
+
+"I don't care what he knows, so long as I get my fifteen dollars back."
+
+Teddy, trembling with apprehension and excitement, went into the
+baggage-room and asked there if a green-covered package had been taken
+in by any of the attendants.
+
+No one had seen such an article, and all were positive there was nothing
+of the kind remaining in their charge.
+
+Then he asked if a bundle of canes had been left there, and to this
+question there was a most decided negative.
+
+"The hangers-on at the fairs haven't begun to come yet," the
+baggage-master said, "and when they do come, we sha'n't have any of
+their stuff to handle, for it will all be transferred across the
+platform without being brought in here. What is the matter? Anything
+gone wrong?"
+
+The lump which had been rising in Teddy's throat was now so large that
+it was with difficulty he could say:
+
+"A man has run off with fifteen dollars of mine, an' Uncle Nathan will
+jest about kill me!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+_A FRIEND._
+
+
+The baggage-master immediately displayed the utmost sympathy for the
+victim of the old fakir's seductive scheme, and Sam was loud in his
+denunciations of a brother in the craft who would serve them in such a
+shabby manner.
+
+"You leave him to me, an' I'll show you what can be done," that young
+gentleman said, and Teddy replied, reproachfully:
+
+"I've left too much to you already. If you hadn't thought it was
+necessary to make the acquaintance of every fellow who was going to the
+fair I'd have my fifteen dollars in my cap now."
+
+"I'll get them back for you."
+
+"How?"
+
+"I can't say jest now; but you wait an' see what I can do."
+
+Inasmuch as Teddy must account first to his mother and afterward to
+Uncle Nathan for that amount, the confident assertion of his friend
+failed to give him any mental relief, and he said, quite sharply:
+
+"You thought it was all right to give the money to him, an' if you
+didn't know any more than a country boy who'd never even heard of such
+fellows, I can't see how you can do much toward helping."
+
+At this point the baggage-master, who had been listening to the
+conversation, broke in with the sage remark:
+
+"It's no use for you fellows to fight over what has been done. The money
+is gone; there's no doubt about that; but it may be you can get it
+back."
+
+"How?" Teddy asked, eagerly.
+
+"By notifying the police, and it is possible that they may find your man
+long before the fair is ended."
+
+"But even if they should, how can I pay Uncle Nathan the eighteen
+dollars he wants, after givin' Deacon Jones the ten which I promised?"
+
+"That, of course, is a question I cannot answer," the officer of the
+company replied, not unkindly; "but it will certainly be better to get
+some of the money back than to lose the whole."
+
+"Of course it will," Sam said, promptly, after waiting a few seconds
+without hearing any reply from Teddy. "Tell us what to do, an' I'll see
+to the whole thing."
+
+"Hello! What kind of a meeting are you holding here?" a cheery voice
+cried, and, looking up, the disconsolate Teddy saw a merchant whose
+stock he had been examining a short time previous.
+
+In a few words the baggage-master explained the condition of affairs.
+
+"Can nothing be done?" the merchant asked.
+
+"It is barely possible. The fact of the matter is that the two swindlers
+left on the last train, and this boy's money has gone with them beyond a
+doubt."
+
+Then the merchant turned to the would-be fakir and asked for further
+particulars, which were readily given, the latter saying, as he finished
+the sad story:
+
+"Uncle Nathan is bound to raise a big row, an' I won't be able to help
+mother, as I counted on doing; but I s'pose it serves me right."
+
+"I'm not so sure of that, lad, for all of us are liable to be taken in
+at some time or another. It is possible you may make money at the fair,
+and I will give you credit to the amount you lost. Go to the store, show
+this slip, and get what you think may be needed."
+
+While speaking the merchant had been writing on a piece of paper torn
+from his memorandum book, and when he handed it to Teddy the almost
+heartbroken boy read the following words:
+
+ The bearer, Edward Hargreaves, is entitled to credit, thirty
+ days' time, on all he may need, to the extent of thirty
+ dollars.
+
+ JOHN REAVES.
+
+"But I only lost fifteen dollars," Teddy said, as he read the order.
+
+"I so understood; but you may need more, therefore I have made the
+amount sufficiently large. Don't hesitate to buy what is wanted, and
+whether you ever find the swindler or not, I feel very positive my bill
+will be paid."
+
+Teddy tried to thank the merchant, but that lump in his throat was still
+too near his mouth to admit of many words, and Sam whispered:
+
+"Don't say anything more about it. You've struck the biggest kind of
+luck, and the safest way is to hold your tongue."
+
+Even had it been possible to speak, Teddy could not have said all that
+was in his heart, and before Sam had time to give any further advice the
+merchant boarded a train which was just starting for New York, leaving
+the young fakir and his newly-made friend to settle matters among
+themselves.
+
+"You're in big luck," the latter said, consolingly. "What's the
+difference if you have lost fifteen dollars so long as you know how to
+get thirty dollars' worth of goods to start in business?"
+
+"But this bill will have to be paid, and Uncle Nathan must have his
+money; that leaves me forty-five dollars in debt."
+
+"S'pose'n it does? You're bound to make a good deal more'n that, an' I'm
+here to help you through."
+
+Teddy came very near saying that if Sam had not been there the fifteen
+dollars would still be reposing beneath the lining of his cap; but he
+succeeded in checking himself, and the reproachful words remained
+unspoken.
+
+At this point in the conversation the baggage-master insisted that
+information of the swindler should be given to the police, and, whether
+they desired to do so or not, the boys were forced to accompany him to
+headquarters.
+
+Here it is possible their story might have been told without exciting
+more than ordinary interest if the name of the kindly-disposed merchant
+had not been used; but that was sufficient to awaken a decided interest,
+and every detail was written down carefully.
+
+"We will try to get the money for you," the chief said. "Several of my
+men will be at the fair, and if you see this fellow again, information
+must be given to them immediately."
+
+Teddy had but little hope that any good would result by this means, but
+he promised faithfully to do as requested, and then the boys were at
+liberty to finish the business which had been interrupted so
+disastrously.
+
+So much time had been wasted that it was necessary to move around very
+lively in order to have the goods ready before the stage should leave,
+and Teddy did a great deal toward expediting matters by explaining to
+the clerk at the store on which he had the order for credit exactly
+what he proposed to do.
+
+The young man understood at once the kind of goods which would be
+needed, and without listening to the many suggestions made by Sam
+selected a good assortment of both knives and canes.
+
+"Ain't you getting more than thirty dollars' worth?" Teddy asked, as the
+clerk continued to add to the pile.
+
+"I think not. These are all cheap goods, you know, and make a big show
+without amounting to any very great value. I will put in cotton cloth
+enough for the cane board, and as many rings as you will need unless
+business should be very brisk."
+
+The clerk was bent on making the bill exactly the size of the order, and
+when the prices had been figured out Teddy had invested just thirty
+dollars in a stock which must bring in a profit of at least fifty per
+cent. in order to admit of his paying the debts already contracted.
+
+The goods were to be put on the stage by the salesman, and there was
+nothing further for the boys to do but decide on their manner of
+traveling to the Run.
+
+"After losin' fifteen dollars, I reckon there's only one thing for me to
+do," Teddy said, as they left the store. "I'm goin'to walk; but you can
+do as you please."
+
+"S'pose'n we both ride? You're bound to make a pile of money before the
+fair is over, an' can afford---- By jinks! There's that fakir now!"
+
+In an instant Sam was off at full speed, crying: "Stop thief!" with the
+full strength of his lungs, as he pursued a man carrying a bundle
+covered with green cloth.
+
+Such an appeal was well calculated to arouse every idler in the
+immediate vicinity, and before Teddy fully understood what had happened
+not less than twenty men and boys were in chase of the stranger, who,
+strange to say, had not quickened his pace.
+
+The thought that it might yet be possible to regain his money lent
+unusual speed to the would-be fakir's heels, and he was among the
+foremost when the man suddenly halted, turned squarely around, and
+asked:
+
+"What is the matter with you people? Do you want me?"
+
+"I guess we do," a policeman replied, as he seized the stranger by the
+collar. "Somebody yelled for us to stop the thief, and you must be the
+man."
+
+"Who says I am?" was the angry question.
+
+By this time both Teddy and Sam had discovered the latter's mistake. The
+only point of resemblance between this stranger and the one who stole
+the money was that both carried packages covered with green cloth; but
+while the first bundle was bulky and apparently heavy, this was small
+and readily held under the man's arm.
+
+Sam did not wait to explain matters. Fearing lest he might get into
+serious trouble because of the mistake, he slipped quietly away, leaving
+Teddy to bear the brunt of the accused's wrath.
+
+The latter realized that something must be done at once, for the greater
+portion of the crowd was looking inquiringly at him, and he said, in a
+voice which was far from steady:
+
+"I didn't do the hollerin'; but a feller who was with me when a man
+stole my money thought you must be the one."
+
+"Where is he?" the stranger asked, advancing threateningly.
+
+"I don't know. He ran away when he saw it was a mistake."
+
+The crowd immediately began to disperse. The policeman called down quite
+the reverse of blessings on Sam's head, and then walked away, leaving
+Teddy and the stranger comparatively alone.
+
+"I don't know as it does any harm to have a lot of fools chasing a man,"
+the latter said, "but it might give him a bad name in his work."
+
+"I'm very sorry, sir, but you see----"
+
+"I'm not blaming you, my boy, since it was the other fellow who did the
+mischief. Tell me how you lost your stuff."
+
+"My what?"
+
+"Your stuff--money."
+
+"Oh!" and Teddy at once gave the stranger a detailed account of all that
+had happened, the latter saying, as the story was concluded:
+
+"I wouldn't be afraid to bet my head that Long Jim was the duck who
+played the trick. I know he came here, headed for the fair grounds, and
+it's jest about his style of working."
+
+"Do you think there's any chance I'll get it back?"
+
+"He shall give up if I see him. I'll be at the fair myself, working a
+neat little game, and will see you there."
+
+With this remark the stranger walked away, and Teddy went toward the
+depot once more, feeling quite certain he had made a friend who would
+aid him in his new venture.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+_UNCLE NATHAN._
+
+
+When Teddy reached the depot he was not obliged to hunt very long for
+Sam, for that young gentleman crept out from behind a pile of baggage on
+seeing his friend was alone, and asked, in a hoarse whisper:
+
+"What did that feller do to you?"
+
+"Nothing; but that don't prove we should get out of another scrape so
+easily, and you must be careful, or we'll be in no end of trouble before
+the fair is ended."
+
+"I was only tryin' to catch your money."
+
+"It surely wouldn't have done any harm if you had found out whether that
+was the man or not before you started the whole crowd after him."
+
+"That's right, rub it into a feller when he tries to do you a good
+turn," Sam said, sarcastically, and then remembering an instant later
+that he proposed to be this boy's guest, he added, "I was only lookin'
+out for you, an' so long as there's been no harm done we needn't talk
+about it. Do you still mean to walk home?"
+
+"There's nothing else to be done, if we want to get to the Run to-night,
+for the stage left while we were chasing that man."
+
+This was exactly what he did not want to do; but, under the
+circumstances, there was no help for it, and the young gentleman who
+expected to form such a prominent portion of the fair set out by the
+side of the friend whom he had injured while thinking to do him a favor.
+
+At the end of a trifle less than three hours, when both were footsore,
+hungry, and weary, the boys arrived at Teddy's home, and Mrs. Hargreaves
+made the stranger welcome despite the inconvenience caused by his
+coming.
+
+Not until after Sam had retired did Teddy tell his mother of the theft,
+and for several moments the widow was in great mental distress; but
+finally she viewed the matter in a more cheerful light, and it was
+resolved that Uncle Nathan should not be told of the mishap.
+
+"It would only make him angry," Mrs. Hargreaves said, "and you must pay
+him before the merchant who was so kind to you gets his money; but I am
+terribly afraid, Teddy, that the whole scheme will be a failure."
+
+The amateur fakir assured her as best he could, and when they retired
+that night both Teddy and his mother were in a comparatively contented
+frame of mind.
+
+The following day was Sunday, on which not even the all engrossing topic
+of cane-boards and knives was to be discussed; but before the family had
+finished breakfast the arrival of a stranger forced them into worldly
+topics.
+
+The newcomer was none other than the man whom Sam had accused of being
+the thief, and he explained the cause of his visit by saying:
+
+"I have reason to believe that Long Jim, the fakir who got away with
+your son's money, will be over here to-night, because the hotels at
+Peach Bottom are crowded, and it is possible he may be forced to give up
+the stuff." Although not exactly understanding what he meant, the widow
+insisted on his coming into the house, and he laid the details of his
+plan before Teddy and Sam.
+
+"I'll hang around here for him," the stranger said, "and you shall say
+if he is the man who did you up; after that I'll take a hand in the
+business, and it'll be queer if between us all we can't make him do the
+square thing, more especially since the rest of his gang haven't come
+yet."
+
+As might be expected, Teddy was excited by the prospect of recovering
+the money which he had believed was lost beyond reclaim, and plans were
+at once laid to trap the dishonest fakir.
+
+While this conversation was being carried on Uncle Nathan came in to
+learn how his nephew had succeeded in town, and the stranger introduced
+himself as Frank Hazelton, a dealer in jewelry, which was to be on
+exhibition during the coming week at the fair.
+
+The old man was delighted to make the stranger's acquaintance, for he
+fancied there would be an opportunity for him to take the agency of a
+valuable line of goods without the outlay of any money, and in a very
+few moments the two were fast friends.
+
+Uncle Nathan not only monopolized nearly all the conversation, but
+insisted on showing Mr. Hazelton around the village, and actually forced
+the latter to accompany him, despite the fact that it was Sunday, when
+an honest merchant is not supposed to so much as think of business.
+
+On the following day it would be necessary for those who had purchased
+the privilege of doing business on the fair grounds to be present, ready
+to select their different sites for working, and very shortly after the
+sun sank behind the hills Sam and Teddy retired in order to be ready for
+an early start next morning, since the first stage left the Run at
+half-past five.
+
+It lacked fully an hour of that time when the boys were called to
+breakfast by Mrs. Hargreaves, and in less than fifteen minutes they were
+at the table eating a hearty breakfast, which was interrupted by the
+appearance of Uncle Nathan, who looked as if he had not been in bed
+since the evening previous.
+
+"I've been robbed!" he cried, passionately, "and this is what comes of
+trying to help my nephew enter a disreputable line of business. I
+believe you induced that man to come here, explaining all about my
+store, simply that he might act the burglar. And it wouldn't take much
+to make me think you had agreed to divide with him the ill-gotten
+gains," he added, shaking his fist in the direction of Teddy, who was so
+astounded by the news as to be literally incapable of movement.
+
+"What do you mean, Nathan?" Mrs. Hargreaves cried.
+
+"Just what I said! My store was robbed last night, and your precious son
+knows the thief better than I do!"
+
+"You mean the man who came here yesterday?" the widow asked, while Teddy
+and Sam gazed at the old man in open-mouthed astonishment.
+
+"Of course I do; who else could it be? Didn't I take him over there
+yesterday, and didn't I explain just how difficult it was to deposit
+money in a bank, because a man would have to pay a dollar to go to
+Waterville an' back, or trust the stage driver to do the business?"
+
+By this time Teddy had recovered something like composure, and he said,
+gravely:
+
+"We have no means of knowing what you said to Mr. Hazelton, but if you
+told him all your business, that is no concern of ours. You insisted on
+his going away with you, and we haven't seen him since."
+
+"But you lied to me about my money."
+
+"In what way?"
+
+"You never said a word about its being stolen."
+
+"If I never said a word I couldn't have told a lie. He has evidently
+given the whole story; but what happened in Waterville has nothing to do
+with the robbery of your store."
+
+"Oh, it hasn't, eh? Well, I'm beginning to think it was a job cooked up
+by all hands to get the best of me."
+
+"If it had been," and now Teddy was on his feet, looking the angry old
+man squarely in the face, "why wouldn't I have said something about it
+in order to make the story seem straighter? A merchant in Waterville
+trusted me for the goods I wanted after he heard the money was gone, and
+I count on paying you before I do him."
+
+"Oh, you do, eh? Well, it's mighty doubtful whether you or this precious
+friend of yours will ever see the fair, for I'm going to get out a
+warrant for the whole lot before I'm done with this thing."
+
+"Would you arrest Teddy when he has been in this house ever since you
+left here yesterday morning?" Mrs. Hargreaves cried.
+
+"I'll have my money back, and the sooner your smart son tells me where
+it is, the sooner he can go about his business; but he must first pay me
+back my eighteen dollars."
+
+"I only borrowed fifteen, Uncle Nathan, and that you will get before
+next Wednesday. If you want to arrest me, go ahead; but I promise that
+you'll be sorry for it."
+
+"So you threaten, do you? That's what comes of trying to help an
+ungrateful boy! I knew he was going to the bad from the first minute he
+talked about having a cane-board," the old man added, as he turned to
+the widow, "and I predict that he'll come to no good even if he manages
+to get out of this scrape."
+
+"You thought it was a good idea for me to do as I proposed," Teddy
+replied, standing his ground bravely, "and was willing to loan me the
+money, provided I would pay you three dollars for the use of fifteen for
+one week."
+
+"That's right; throw in my teeth what I wanted to do in order to help
+you along, and call me an old skinflint. I am old enough to expect such
+things from such as you."
+
+"I haven't called you any names, nor do I intend to do so; I only wanted
+mother to know the truth of the business between us. Do you really
+believe I had any hand in breaking into your store?"
+
+"If you didn't your friends did, and that amounts to the same thing, as
+you'll soon find out. I'll have a warrant issued for the arrest of the
+whole crowd, if you don't tell me the truth this very minute."
+
+"But I don't know anything, Uncle Nathan."
+
+"I'll have the truth out of you before the day is ended," the old man
+cried, angrily, and without saying or doing anything save to shake his
+fist in the direction of his nephew and Sam he left the house.
+
+As yet none of the little party knew the full extent of what had
+happened, but before Uncle Nathan was fairly out of the yard a neighbor
+came around to tell Mrs. Hargreaves that the old man's store had been
+entered by burglars on the night previous, and a large amount of money,
+together with the most valuable goods, had been carried away.
+
+It is not difficult to imagine the consternation which seized upon the
+little party after Uncle Nathan's departure. Teddy was so overwhelmed
+that it was literally impossible for him to say a word, and Sam shook
+like one in an ague fit at the thought that he might be carried off to
+jail before it was possible for him to astonish the people by his skill
+as an oarsman.
+
+"You must not think of leaving here until we know what your uncle
+proposes to do," Mrs. Hargreaves said, as she returned to the
+dining-room after talking with the neighbor. "Of course I know that
+neither of you two boys had anything to do with the robbery; but you
+must not run away."
+
+"I've got to leave, no matter what the old fool says," Sam replied. "I
+don't know how the folks would get along if I didn't show up, an' it
+won't do to disappoint them."
+
+"Are you going?" Teddy asked, and Sam replied in a voice which trembled
+despite all his efforts to make it sound firm:
+
+"Of course I am. You don't allow I'm such an idiot as to stay till he
+can have me arrested, an' if you're sensible, both of us will go."
+
+"I must stay here, an' lose all my chances of making money," Teddy said,
+gloomily.
+
+"All right, then I'm off, an' after I once get on the fair grounds I'll
+bet that old duffer won't get hold of me."
+
+Sam did not propose to lose any time. He had no baggage, and in a very
+few moments after so deciding he was walking up the road over which the
+stage would pass, while Teddy, with a heavier heart than he had ever
+known before, waited for his uncle to send the officers of the law to
+carry him to prison.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+_THE FAIR._
+
+
+It seemed to Teddy as if everything pleasant in life had departed from
+him as he waited for the return of Uncle Nathan accompanied by the
+officers of the law, and neither he nor his mother had any idea that the
+visit would be long delayed.
+
+The widow had every proof, even if her heart had not told the truth,
+that her son was innocent of the charge which the angry old man made.
+She knew both he and Sam remained in the house during the entire day
+previous to the robbery, and it would have been almost impossible for
+them to have left during the night without her knowledge; but at the
+same time it was only reasonable she should be distressed in mind as to
+the final outcome of the matter.
+
+One, two, three hours passed, and yet no arrest had been made.
+
+Teddy no longer hoped to play the part of fakir at the fair; but yet he
+fancied it might be possible to sell his stock, which had already been
+forwarded by the stage, to some more fortunate fellow, and in order to
+do this it was necessary he should be on the grounds at the earliest
+possible hour; but the charge made by his uncle held him a voluntary
+prisoner.
+
+At eight o'clock a neighbor, whose love of gossip was greater than her
+desire for housework, came to the garden gate to say that she had just
+heard the justice of the peace refuse to issue a warrant for either of
+the boys, and she added to this information her belief that it, the
+burglary, was a judgment upon Uncle Nathan for presuming to talk
+business on the Sabbath.
+
+When this busybody had departed, Mrs. Hargreaves said, as she re-entered
+the house:
+
+"There is no longer any reason, Teddy, why you shouldn't carry out your
+plans. Every one in this village knows where to find you in case a
+warrant is granted, which doesn't now seem possible, and it is better to
+go ahead as you proposed, knowing that your mother is certain you are
+innocent of any wrongdoing."
+
+Teddy's one desire had been to be on the fair grounds, and when this
+advice was given from "a fellow's best friend," he started at once,
+saying as he left the house:
+
+"I'll come back if there's nothing to do; but there's no reason to worry
+if you don't see me until Saturday, for I shall stay jest as long as
+things run smooth."
+
+Ten minutes later, while he was trudging along the dusty road with no
+other idea than that he would be forced to walk the entire distance, a
+friend in a wagon overtook him, proposed that he ride, and before the
+fair grounds were reached he had heard all the particulars of the
+robbery.
+
+It appeared that the burglars must have effected an entrance to Uncle
+Nathan's store after midnight Saturday, and when the proprietor arrived
+on the following morning there was absolutely no clue to the thieves.
+
+"They must have had a wagon to take away all the old man says he has
+lost," Teddy's informant added, as the story was concluded, "and because
+of that the justice refused to issue a warrant for the man who slept at
+the hotel last night. Of course the idea that you knew anything about it
+was all in that old fool's eye."
+
+"Then nobody has been arrested?" Teddy exclaimed, in surprise.
+
+"Of course not, an' more than one in town hopes he'll never see hide nor
+hair of his goods or money; but between you an' me I don't believe he's
+lost half as much as he tries to make out."
+
+To this last assertion Teddy gave but little heed; the all absorbing
+thought in his mind was as to whether he would actually be arrested for
+the crime, and this was sufficient to prevent any speculations as to
+the amount of loss, or his former dreams of the future.
+
+Arriving at the fair grounds, he found everything in a state of
+confusion. Goods were arriving and being put in place; men were
+quarreling for this or that vantage ground, and carpenters were busy in
+every direction.
+
+As a matter of course, he knew that all this would be changed on the
+following day when the visitors began to arrive; but, nevertheless, it
+gave him a homesick feeling which he could not suppress, and, for a
+time, prevented him from attending to his own interests.
+
+"Hello! What are you sittin' there for?" a voice cried, after he had
+remained inactive near the entrance nearly an hour, debating in his own
+mind whether or not it would be worth the while to unpack the goods
+which he knew were awaiting his call somewhere on the grounds.
+
+Looking up quickly he saw Sam, self-possessed and jaunty as at the first
+moment he met him in Waterville, but wearing an air of considerably more
+importance.
+
+"Have you gone to work yet?" he asked, listlessly.
+
+"Of course not; there's nothin' for me to do till the folks begin to
+come in to see how well I can row a boat. What did the old duffer do?"
+
+"Do you mean Uncle Nathan?"
+
+"Of course."
+
+"He hasn't had anybody arrested yet; but there's no knowin' how soon
+he'll begin."
+
+"He'd better not try it on me," Sam said, with an assumption of
+boldness. "I've found a feller here that's goin' to show off rifles, an'
+I can borrow as many as I want if he does any funny business."
+
+"Would you shoot anybody?"
+
+"You jest stay till an old lunatic comes along sayin' I've helped to rob
+him when your mother knows where I was, an' see what I'll do," Sam
+replied, in a really bloodthirsty tone as he turned to walk away, and
+then, as if reconsidering the matter, he stopped long enough to say,
+"Wait here a minute, an' I'll show you a feller what knows a thing or
+two."
+
+Inasmuch as Teddy had no idea of moving from the position he had taken
+up near the gate it was not irksome to do as the exhibitor of boats
+requested, and without troubling his head as to who this very important
+person might be, he remained at the precise spot until Sam returned with
+a boy who appeared to be a year or two older than himself.
+
+"This is Dan Summers, an' he's here to help show off a dandy rifle made
+in Chicopee Falls down in Massachusetts, or some such place. He'll help
+us out of the scrape if anybody can."
+
+Dan looked as if this introduction was disagreeable to him rather than
+otherwise, and after nodding to Teddy, he said, in an explanatory tone:
+
+"I'm here to help the man what exhibits goods from the Stevens Arms
+Company, that's all; but I don't see how I could be of any help if you
+fellers have got in a fuss."
+
+"Neither do I," Teddy replied, and then to show that no one could aid
+him, he told the whole story, including all that Uncle Nathan had said.
+
+"I wouldn't let that worry me," Dan said, philosophically, when the tale
+was ended. "If you want to make any money out of this fair it is time
+you was lookin' out for a stand, an' I know of the best place on the
+grounds. Come with me now, an' you can get it before the crowd of fakirs
+have a chance to take it up."
+
+Teddy, rather liking the appearance of this boy, resolved to follow his
+advice, and signified the same by slipping down from the stack of
+exhibits, as he said:
+
+"Show it to me an' I'll get right to work, for there's forty-five
+dollars I've got to pay back, no matter what Uncle Nathan makes up his
+mind to do."
+
+"That's the way to talk," Sam cried, approvingly, and forthwith he
+proceeded to take charge of his two acquaintances, resolved that lack of
+energy should not prevent him from sharing in their triumphs, if indeed,
+they had any.
+
+Dan professed to have had considerable experience with fairs, and the
+manner in which he proceeded to work showed that there had been no
+boasting on his part. He selected a spot where nearly all of the
+visitors would be forced to pass in order to see the cattle or the
+racing, and set about putting up a stand for Teddy in the most approved
+manner.
+
+He ordered Sam here and there to such places as he had seen an
+accumulation of lumber, and so well did he work, after borrowing an ax
+and a hatchet from a "candy butcher," that it was not yet noon when
+Teddy had an inclosure sufficiently large for his purpose; the cloth was
+in place and the holes cut for the canes, so that it would be but the
+work of a few moments to make everything ready when business should
+begin.
+
+"You can't do the whole thing yourself if there is anything like the
+crowd that ought to come," Dan said, "and I advise you to hire a clerk."
+
+"Where'll I find one?" Teddy asked, helplessly.
+
+"Take some of the fellers from your own village; but be sure they're
+honest, for after business begins there won't be any chance to watch
+'em."
+
+Teddy thought he could find the proper party before the following day,
+and then came the question of where they were to sleep.
+
+"I've got that all fixed," Sam said, confidently.
+
+"The man what runs the museum in that big tent is a friend of mine, an'
+he won't say a word if we stay under the canvas to-night."
+
+"How long have you known him?" Teddy asked, warned by previous
+experience that Sam's statements were not always to be depended upon.
+
+"I never saw him till this morning; but that don't make no difference so
+long as he's willin' for us to stay there."
+
+"We'll go over an' look around," Dan said, leading the way, and to the
+surprise of at least one of the party it was found that Master Sam's
+statement was absolutely correct.
+
+The proprietor of the museum was more than willing to allow the boys to
+sleep under his canvas, for the very good reason that they would act as
+sentinels in lieu of those he had neglected to hire, and all three went
+away in search of a place where they could obtain meals during the
+expected five days of excitement and money-making.
+
+This was even a more simple matter than the first. At a boarding-house
+nearly opposite the main entrance to the grounds they could be
+accommodated at a reasonable rate, and the preliminaries had been
+settled. It only remained now to welcome the visitors, and get from them
+as much money as possible.
+
+Teddy almost forgot the terrible fact that his Uncle Nathan might yet
+have him arrested, and Sam acted as if such a thing had never been
+possible.
+
+It is true all three of the boys discussed the possibility of finding
+the money which had been stolen from Teddy; but neither thought of
+connecting the two crimes as the work of one person.
+
+During the afternoon Teddy looked around in the hope of seeing the man,
+unjustly accused of the theft, who had promised to aid him; but as yet
+he had not put in an appearance, and it seemed as if all the choice
+places would be taken before he arrived.
+
+It was anything rather than sport to wander around the almost deserted
+grounds, and at an early hour, after partaking of a remarkably poor
+supper, the three boys sought the seclusion granted by the mildewed
+canvas of the alleged museum of the "world's wonders."
+
+A goat, a wax baby, two or three snakes, an alligator, and a
+contortionist, who was none other than the proprietor of this
+magnificent array of "marvels," made up the entire list of curiosities;
+but the tent would shelter the young fakirs from the wind and dew, and
+it was possible they might sleep as soundly as at home.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+_A CLUE._
+
+
+Sam and Dan, who had worked at many fairs and been forced to sleep in
+far less desirable places, thought it was a rare piece of good fortune
+to get such comfortable quarters free; but the prospect of lying on the
+ground all night was far from pleasing to Teddy.
+
+He looked around for some spot softer than another; but there was no
+choice, and he said to himself:
+
+"There's one satisfaction about it, I'm better off on the ground than I
+would have been if Uncle Nathan had succeeded in having me arrested and
+put in jail."
+
+This thought caused the interior of the tent to seem less disagreeable,
+and he almost persuaded himself that it would be sport to stay all night
+in a museum with a real contortionist as host.
+
+Dan had thrown himself at full length on the ground where he could watch
+the proprietor of this "enormous exhibition" cook his supper on an
+oil-stove, and Sam, anxious about other people's affairs as usual,
+devoted his entire time to asking questions regarding the business.
+
+"How do you count on gettin' along when the crowds get here? You can't
+sell tickets an' act too."
+
+"I've got a barker an' a clown coming to-morrow; it was no use to pay
+'em wages for layin' around when there was nothing to be done but put up
+the tent."
+
+"What's a 'barker?'" Sam asked, in surprise.
+
+"Why, the man who stands outside an' does the talking, of course."
+
+Then, his supper having been cooked and eaten, the host amused himself
+and his guests by telling of his experience in the show business;
+relating stories and talking of the different fakirs he had met.
+
+"When I started out," he said, "I made up my mind that a fortune could
+be made in one season. I bought a fine tent; had lots of performers,
+about twenty animals, and a dozen cases of stuffed birds and other
+curiosities. We struck hard luck from the sendoff, an' first the woman
+with an iron jaw gave me the shake because she got tired of waiting for
+the salary that never came. Two of the bears grew so disgusted with the
+bad business that they died, and one after another of the people
+skipped, till I was pretty nigh alone. A sheriff in Harmer seized the
+cases, another levied on my live stock, and it has only taken two
+seasons to bring the show down to where you see it."
+
+This was not pleasing information for Teddy, who was obliged to make
+such a large amount of money in order to free himself from debt, and he
+asked:
+
+"Isn't it possible to make money at every fair? I thought the fakirs got
+rich in a little while."
+
+"So did I before I went into the business. A fellow may make a big stake
+this week and lose it all at the next stand. If you strike bad weather,
+or a crowd that hasn't got any money, it's up-hill work to pull in the
+entrance fee. Now, I have to pay a hundred dollars for this privilege,
+because I've got a big tent, and it wouldn't be any more if I had a show
+to compare with it in size. It'll take a good many ten-cent pieces to
+make that up."
+
+This plain statement of facts caused Teddy to figure how many nickels he
+must receive before the capital invested and stolen would be returned,
+and the result was far from gratifying.
+
+"The eighteen dollars which must be given to Uncle Nathan, the thirty I
+owe in Waterville, and ten I paid for the privilege of running the
+boards makes eleven hundred and sixty five-cent pieces. I'll never see
+so many customers as that, and Aunt Sarah was right when she called me a
+fool for thinking of going into the business," he said to himself, as
+his companions began to make their preparations for the night.
+
+It is useless to "cry over spilled milk," however, and this he realized
+in time to prevent himself from being plunged into the lowest depths of
+despondency. It was barely possible business would be exceptionally
+good, he argued mentally, and if hard work could accomplish the desired
+result he must be successful.
+
+Dan was already lying down with his head toward the side of the tent and
+his feet near the oil-stove, which had been left burning because of the
+dampness, and Teddy crawled over by the side of him. Sam had decided to
+sleep by the side of his host, probably with the idea that he might
+appear to be on terms of greater intimacy, and all hands gave themselves
+up to slumber.
+
+The excitement of the morning and subsequent labor had so tried Teddy
+that, despite the hardness of his bed, he fell asleep in a very few
+moments, and it was not yet nine o'clock when all the inmates of the
+tent, save the goat, and possibly the alligator and snakes, were wrapped
+in blissful unconsciousness.
+
+Half an hour later a terrific yell from Sam caused the remainder of the
+party to spring to their feet in alarm.
+
+"What's the matter?" Dan cried.
+
+"Somebody has got into the tent and been poundin' me with a club! I'm
+pretty near killed."
+
+The faint glow cast by the oil-stove was not sufficient to illumine any
+portion of the tent, and the host made all haste to light a lantern,
+after which Dan proceeded to search for the supposed intruder; but
+before he had taken a dozen steps the proprietor of the museum burst
+into a hearty laugh.
+
+"Funny, ain't it?" Sam cried, angrily. "I s'pose you'd laugh if I'd been
+killed in your old tent!"
+
+This savage remark appeared to excite the man's mirth rather than check
+it, and while he was thus enjoying himself Teddy and Dan stood gazing at
+him in surprise.
+
+It was several minutes before the man could speak, and then he said, as
+he pointed to the goat who stood a short distance away calmly munching
+some potato parings:
+
+"That's the fellow who has been beating your friend with a club. I
+always let him loose at night, and he has walked over our dying boy."
+
+Sam insisted that he had been beaten with a club; but on examining his
+clothing two spots of fresh earth were found, showing where the animal
+had stepped. A hoof-print on the sleeve and another directly on the
+breast of his coat comprised the full amount of damage done.
+
+The boy who had believed himself so dangerously wounded now grew angry,
+and, leaping to his feet, declared he would not remain in the tent
+another minute unless the goat was tied.
+
+"There's nothing to prevent your bunking somewhere else," the owner of
+the animal replied, quite sharply.
+
+"Billy always has had the liberty of the tent at night, and I reckon he
+won't lose it now."
+
+Sam started toward the entrance; but before reaching it he realized that
+he would be punishing no one but himself, and slowly turned back, saying
+as he approached the stove:
+
+"It's too late to hunt for lodgings now, an' I s'pose I'll have to make
+the best of it."
+
+"I guess you will," the host replied, quietly, and the angry Sam lay
+down on the seat of the baggage wagon, to insure himself against another
+visit from "Billy."
+
+This incident had driven the desire for sleep from the eyelids of Teddy
+and Dan, and they remained awake some time after the loud breathing of
+their companions told that the visit from the goat had been temporarily
+effaced from their minds.
+
+Now Teddy discovered what a hard, uncomfortable bed the bare earth was,
+and after tossing about for half an hour, he whispered to Dan:
+
+"Do you suppose it would be any better in the wagon?"
+
+"No; you'll get used to it in a little while, and the ground is softer
+than a board."
+
+Teddy was about to reply when the sound of voices from the outside
+attracted his attention, and then came the crackle as of a match being
+lighted.
+
+Two or more men had halted near the canvas within a few feet of where
+the boys were lying, evidently that they might be sheltered from the
+wind while getting their pipes or cigars in working order.
+
+A moment later both the listeners heard one of the newcomers say:
+
+"I don't think it will be safe for you to show up very much while we
+stay here."
+
+"Why not? If them boys recognize me it will be an easy matter to
+frighten 'em into holdin' their tongues, and there's goin' to be good
+pickin's this week."
+
+"But what's the use of runnin' any risk? We've made a fairly good haul
+already, an' it's better to get safe off with that than stick our noses
+where it'll be hard work to pull them back."
+
+Teddy was in the highest possible excitement. In the tone of the second
+speaker's voice he recognized the man who had stolen his money, and he
+punched Dan with his elbow to assure himself that the latter was
+listening.
+
+"Keep quiet," Dan whispered, and then the conversation on the outside
+was continued.
+
+"I'll take good care to keep shady, an' you see what can be done
+to-morrow."
+
+[Illustration: The boys crept through the flap of the tent and followed
+the two men.]
+
+"Will you promise not to leave the house till after dark?"
+
+"I thought you had more nerve; but so long as you haven't I reckon I'll
+promise, for this is bound to be a fat thing, and I don't want to lose
+the whole of it.
+
+"When these country jays begin to send their stuff home I'll have ours
+shipped, an' there's little danger it'll be overhauled, more especially
+since the old man couldn't get a warrant for the only one he suspects.
+It's a safe bet that Hazelton has a pretty good idea who did the job,
+an' if they make trouble for him he'll most likely tell what he thinks."
+
+"There's no call to be afraid of him after he has worked a couple of
+days, for those he ropes in would do all they could to have him
+arrested."
+
+The last portion of this remark was almost indistinguishable, owing to
+the fact that the men were walking away, and when the sound of their
+footsteps could no longer be heard Teddy said:
+
+"Those are the men who robbed Uncle Nathan's store, an' I'm certain one
+of them got my money."
+
+"Would you know their voices if you heard them again?"
+
+"Sure; but why don't we find out where they are going? It wouldn't be a
+hard job."
+
+"Are you willin' to sneak after them?"
+
+"Of course I am. Come on!"
+
+The boys arose softly and crept through the flap of the tent without
+awakening the sleepers.
+
+The night was dark and cloudy, and it was impossible to see any very
+great distance in either direction; but Dan had taken especial heed to
+the course taken by the men, and he started off without hesitation.
+
+"We ought to have a club or something to protect ourselves in case they
+should see us," Teddy whispered.
+
+"We won't get near enough to let them do much mischief. Do you see two
+sparks over there? They are the lighted ends of cigars, an' our men are
+behind them."
+
+Dan quickened his pace; but he had failed to calculate the distance
+correctly, and was much nearer the game than he had suspected.
+
+"Be careful they don't see us," he said, in a low tone, and in another
+instant the boys were directly in front of the men.
+
+Teddy started back in alarm; but he was too late. In an instant the
+sparks flashed before his eyes, and he fell to the ground unconscious
+just as Dan succeeded in warding off the blow of a fist which was aimed
+at him.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+_THE CLERK._
+
+
+When Teddy recovered from the vicious blow which had rendered him
+unconscious he saw Dan lying on the ground beside him, but no one else
+was near.
+
+It was as if they had been fighting with phantoms of the brain, save for
+the fact that both bore the most indisputable signs of having been
+assaulted by beings of true flesh and blood.
+
+One of Dan's eyes was closed as if by a violent blow, and Teddy bled
+freely from the ear, the crimson fluid telling eloquently of the exact
+location of that superior force which had caused so many stars to dance
+before his mental vision.
+
+"We got through with that part of it mighty quick," Dan said, ruefully,
+as he rose to his feet. "There wasn't anything slow about the way they
+struck out after we made fools of ourselves by running into them, eh?"
+
+"I don't understand how it all happened. It wasn't more than three
+seconds from the time I first saw them before there was a regular set
+of fireworks dancing in front of my eyes."
+
+"It so happens that they saw us first," Dan replied, as he rubbed his
+head. "Those men were the thieves, and what I said showed them that we
+were on the scent."
+
+"Where are they now?"
+
+"You'll have to ask that question of someone else," Dan said, with a
+grimace of pain. "The last thing I know was when the tall fellow landed
+one square on my nose, and before I recovered both were out of sight. We
+have done harm rather than good, for now they know we overheard the
+conversation, an' we'll be mighty lucky if this is all we get before the
+fair comes to an end."
+
+"Suppose we tell the police now?"
+
+"What can you say to them? We heard those men talking about something
+which may have had nothing to do with the robbery, and want to have them
+arrested. On what grounds will we ask for a warrant? Besides, if Nathan
+Hargreaves was my uncle, I would let him fight his own battles."
+
+"But I owe him eighteen dollars."
+
+"What of that? He wouldn't take a penny off if you got your head broke
+while trying to find his money, and after all that has happened I think
+we have good reason to let him severely alone."
+
+"I'm willing to go back to the tent," Teddy said, as he began to feel
+faint, and Dan aided him during the short walk, both staggering as they
+came through the flap, meeting their host near the entrance, who asked,
+sharply:
+
+"What has been going on? I counted on helping a party of boys, rather
+than giving my tent up to a lot of roughs, as you appear to be."
+
+In the fewest possible words Dan explained what had happened, and in
+addition told all the story of Teddy's losing his money, together with
+the accusation made by Uncle Nathan.
+
+"I'm sorry I said a word," and the proprietor of the museum did really
+appear to be grieved. "It makes no difference whether you got a whipping
+or not, the guilty parties are here, and you can count on my help in
+turning them up."
+
+"That's what I'm afraid we sha'n't be able to do," Teddy replied; "we
+tried our best to-night, and got the worst of it."
+
+"There is plenty of time between now and Saturday. I'll do all any man
+can, an' it'll be strange if we don't get some proof before the fair
+closes."
+
+"How did you know we were out?" Dan asked.
+
+"I saw you go, and there was no reason why I should kick; but I began to
+be afraid you were up to something crooked. Now I know the whole story,
+I'll do my best to help you out of the scrape. Go to sleep, and we'll
+talk the whole matter over in the morning."
+
+This was good advice, but not easily followed. Both the boys began to
+feel the effects of the blows received from the thieves, and the pain
+resulting therefrom was not conducive to repose.
+
+They did manage to close their eyes in slumber now and then, however,
+and when the day broke Mr. Sweet, the proprietor of the museum, was
+standing ready to minister to their necessities.
+
+"You haven't got exactly the right kind of faces to bring very big
+business," he said, cheerily; "but I reckon we can make a change in the
+general appearance. Use this plentifully as a bath, and before business
+opens you'll be respectable members of society."
+
+It was certainly necessary for them to do something toward improving
+their appearance. Teddy's ear was swollen to nearly twice its natural
+size, and Dan had an eye which was rapidly blackening.
+
+Thanks to the application provided by the owner of the museum, these
+evidences of a fight were rapidly reduced, and when Sam awoke they
+looked little the worse for wear, although he readily discovered that
+something serious had happened while he was wrapped in slumber.
+
+"What has been goin' on?" he asked, suspiciously.
+
+"Nothing much," Dan replied, with a forced laugh. "The goat walked over
+us, and we're kinder used up, that's all. Are you ready to go to
+breakfast?"
+
+It was evident that Sam did not believe this explanation, but since he
+said nothing more about it, the two actors in the previous night's
+adventures held their peace; therefore it would not be in his power to
+betray any secrets.
+
+Breakfast was eaten at an early hour, and the young fakirs returned to
+the grounds in time for Teddy to meet the first visitors.
+
+Under Dan's instructions he continued to cry out:
+
+"Here's where you can get a cane or a knife for nothing! Three rings for
+five cents, and every time you throw it over the mark you get what you
+ring! Three for five, and every cane or knife you ring is yours!"
+
+It was yet too early for the exhibits to be opened, therefore Teddy had
+the assistance of his friends in reclaiming the rings thrown, and after
+nearly four dollars had been taken in with a loss only of a ten cent
+cane, the amateur fakir began to understand that it would be necessary
+for him to have a clerk.
+
+"You're bound to do a good business this week," Dan said, at about eight
+o'clock. "Sam and I must go now to attend to our own work, an' if you
+see some fellow who can be trusted, I advise you to hire him, or
+there'll be considerable trade lost, for when these people want to spend
+their money they won't wait for you to hunt up assistants."
+
+"Yes, I reckon there's more'n a thousand who are jest aching to see how
+I can row in one of them dandy boats," Master Sam added; "but if you get
+into any kind of a scrape, an' don't know how to get out, come to me.
+I'll see you through, no matter how good business is."
+
+These two friends and advisers had hardly left him when a particular
+chum from the Run came up, and knowing he could be trusted, Teddy
+immediately made a trade for his services.
+
+Tim Jones accepted the offer of ten cents on each dollar which might be
+taken in, and straightway engaged himself as Teddy's clerk, promising
+faithfully to account for every penny he should receive.
+
+"I know you are honest," the proprietor of the board said to his friend,
+"and I want you to help me on the square, so I'm willing to give a fair
+price, for I may have to be away a good deal of the time."
+
+"You mean that Nathan Hargreaves is goin' to have you arrested?"
+
+"Why do you say that?"
+
+"Because he's tellin' around town at the Run that you know who robbed
+his store, an' says he'll have a warrant out, if he has to go to
+Waterville for it."
+
+"That is where he's making a great big mistake, Tim; but if he should do
+anything of the kind I expect you to do your best here," and Teddy spoke
+very solemnly, for he really believed his uncle would succeed in having
+him arrested. "I don't know positively who broke into his store; but Dan
+an' I heard enough last night to make us believe we can find the thieves
+if we have time to work it out."
+
+"I'd let him hustle to get the stuff, if it was my pudding," Tim replied
+with emphasis, and then as a party of young fellows bent on spending
+money approached the board he began to cry, as lustily as might have
+been expected from any old fakir:
+
+"Here's where you get 'em, three rings for a nickel, and every cane or
+knife you ring is yours; all for the small sum of five cents!"
+
+Convinced that he had a capable clerk, who was willing to work hard in
+order to earn an additional percentage, Teddy contented himself with
+making change for the rush of customers, which continued unabated until
+nearly ten o'clock and then came a lull, when he was able to watch the
+other fakirs around him.
+
+Up to this point business had continued in the most promising manner,
+and if it held out as well there would be no difficulty in his paying
+all the money he owed, even although there might be no very large
+profit.
+
+"I only want to get out square," he said to himself, while nursing his
+injured ear; but this experience led him to believe it was possible to
+do very much toward helping his mother, and already had he begun to
+dream of large returns, despite the fifteen dollars out of which he had
+been swindled.
+
+It was just when his customers had gone to other parts of the ground,
+and after Teddy had figured up the amount of money taken in, showing
+that there was nearly eight dollars in the treasury with an offset only
+of one twenty-cent knife and two ten-cent canes lost, that the young
+fakir saw Hazelton standing some distance away beckoning to him.
+
+"Look out sharp for things, Tim," he cried, as he vaulted over the
+railing and ran to the side of the man whom he believed to be a friend.
+
+"Did anything happen last night?" the latter asked.
+
+Teddy told him the whole story, keeping back not one incident.
+
+"I heard quite so much in the hotel where I board. It is Long Jim and
+his partner who have done the job of which both you and I are accused.
+As for your uncle, he isn't worth a minute's thought; but I'm going to
+get to work, an' what he says may go against me, so you and I must turn
+those fellows up if we can."
+
+"Ain't your business honest?" Teddy asked, in surprise.
+
+"Well, when we come right down to dots, I don't suppose it is. Watch me
+when I leave here, and you'll have a chance to judge for yourself. I
+may want to leave my satchel with you for a while, and I reckon you're
+willing to take care of it?"
+
+"Of course I am. I'll do anything you ask."
+
+"Better wait and see the game first, but don't forget that we've got to
+turn up the two men who whipped you and your friend last night, or stand
+the chance of being hauled up for the robbery ourselves."
+
+"Did you say anything to Uncle Nathan to make him think you would break
+into his store?"
+
+"No; I only played him for a jay, as you shall see me do with two or
+three hundred of these smart fellows here, and he jumped down on me
+because there was no one else on whom to fasten the crime. I've got to
+go, now. Don't forget to hurry back to your cane-board when you see I'm
+getting through with my first stand, for I want to leave my stuff with
+somebody whom I can trust."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+_THE JEWELRY FAKIR._
+
+
+Teddy's curiosity regarding the kind of business which Hazelton proposed
+to do was so great that, for the time being, he forgot his own venture
+in watching this supposed friend.
+
+The jewelry fakir disappeared amid the crowd for a few moments,
+reappearing in a carriage drawn by a fancifully decorated horse, and the
+gaudy trappings caused the sightseers to stop, believing something
+interesting or curious was to be seen.
+
+Hazelton introduced himself as an agent for a large manufacturing
+company, and proposed to dispose of "samples" of their goods in a manner
+which would be satisfactory to all. He began by throwing away great
+numbers of cheap rings made to imitate gold, and as the boys scrambled
+for them he complained that the older members of the throng--those
+people whom he particularly wished should test the merits of his
+wares--were getting nothing.
+
+"I can change that," he said, after hesitating a moment, as if to devise
+some plan. Then holding up half a dozen pairs of cuff-buttons, he
+continued: "I am allowed to give away only six of these. What gentleman
+will advance twenty-five cents for one of these sets, knowing the money
+will be returned to him? By that means I shall place the goods where
+they will do the most good."
+
+In a short time the necessary number of purchasers was found, each
+having paid a quarter of a dollar, and then, with great ostentation, the
+fakir returned to every one the money he had given.
+
+A similar performance was gone through with in the case of ten seal
+rings, and by that time the crowd were in a state of high excitement,
+for they were getting supposedly valuable goods by simply loaning this
+agent their money for a short time.
+
+The fakir then held up a lot of watch-chains, asking who would give him
+a dollar for one, but in this instance he made no mention of returning
+the money.
+
+Believing these also were to be given away, every man scrambled to pass
+up his dollar before the supply should be exhausted, and fully two
+hundred dollars was taken in by the generous "agent." Then, as the
+demand ceased, Hazelton produced from his valise what appeared to be a
+heavy gold watch.
+
+Wrapping it in paper, and attaching it to a chain, he cried:
+
+"Who wants to take another, and receive as a present what I have
+fastened to the end of it; but on the condition that this paper shall
+not be removed until I give permission?"
+
+A young fellow standing near Teddy made all possible haste to pass the
+fakir a dollar and receive the prize.
+
+Then the remainder of the crowd clamored for more to be put up in the
+same manner, and Hazelton disposed of at least a hundred before the
+clamorous throng could be appeased.
+
+While this was being done Teddy saw the young fellow slyly remove the
+paper and examine his goods. A look of anger and disappointment
+overspread his face as a cheap, empty locket, fashioned on the outside
+something like the case of a watch, was revealed to view. Twenty cents
+would have been an extravagantly high price for what he had paid a
+dollar; but it was possible the agent would return the money as he had
+done in the previous cases, and the victimized fellow held his peace.
+
+Hazelton was now ready to take a hurried departure. No more dollars were
+passed up, and quickly seizing the reins, he said:
+
+"I have not represented these goods to be gold; but they are a fine
+imitation, and Mr. Nathan Hargreaves, of Peach Bottom Run, will probably
+act as my agent for the sale of them. You can get what may be wanted
+from him if you need any more."
+
+The last words were hardly spoken before he drove quickly through the
+throng, leaving his dupes in a daze, from which they did not recover
+until he was lost to view.
+
+Now Teddy understood what the "Give-Away" game was, and he also knew
+that it was far from being honest, although Hazelton had really made no
+promises which he did not fulfill.
+
+Some of the victims were angry, and vowed to flog "that feller within an
+inch of his life" before sunset; others bore their loss philosophically,
+and turned away with the remark that the fakir was "a cute one," while
+the majority hastened off lest they should be suspected of being
+victims.
+
+Teddy returned to his cane-board feeling sad because he had been so
+mistaken in this particular man, and had hardly reached there when
+Hazelton, on foot, came from the side of the fair grounds opposite where
+he had disappeared, saying hurriedly, as he handed the boy a black
+satchel somewhat resembling a sample case:
+
+"Look out for this! All my money is in it."
+
+Without waiting for an answer the man was gone, and the young fakir was
+in no slight distress at being the custodian of so much wealth.
+
+After considerable discussion with Tim he decided to leave it behind the
+cane-board where it would be screened from view, and then a crowd of
+customers suddenly appearing, he was so busy during the next half hour
+that he hardly had time to think of that which had been intrusted to his
+keeping.
+
+Not until trade grew dull once more did Hazelton appear, looking
+decidedly well pleased with himself, and, standing where the passers-by
+could not hear, he asked:
+
+"Well, what do you think of the give-away game now?"
+
+"It looks to me like a swindle," Teddy replied, bluntly. "The things you
+sold were not worth half what you got for them."
+
+"Six cents apiece for the chains, and five for the lockets is what I pay
+by the quantity," the fakir said, with a laugh.
+
+"But you made the people think they were getting real watches."
+
+"I was mighty careful to say nothing of the kind. They thought they saw
+a watch, and I told them I would make each purchaser a present of what
+was on the chain. Their idea was to get the best of me, and in that I
+didn't lose very much. It's a case of setting a thief to catch a thief,
+and the smartest man comes out ahead."
+
+"But why did you leave all the money with me?"
+
+"Because it sometimes happens that my customers make a kick, and try to
+get back their stuff by force, so I don't carry much cash in my pockets
+while I am on the fair grounds."
+
+"Of course you are all through now. You can't expect to do the same
+thing over again."
+
+"That's exactly what I shall do in about an hour, only in a different
+portion of the inclosure, and you'll see that I can catch just as many
+suckers as before."
+
+Then, in order to be rid of the satchel, for it seemed as if he was
+really concerned in the swindle so long as it remained in his keeping,
+Teddy said he wanted to see what Dan and Sam were doing.
+
+"Go ahead; I'll stay near by where I can keep an eye on the stuff, so
+you needn't let that worry you."
+
+As a matter of fact, the boy was not eager to leave his place of
+business; but having said so, it was necessary to go, or let Hazelton
+understand exactly why the remark had been made.
+
+Cautioning Tim to "keep his eyes open for trade," he walked across the
+grounds to the building where Dan was employed, and found that young
+gentleman displaying the good qualities of a peculiar-looking weapon.
+
+"This is the Model Pocket Rifle," Dan was saying to a party of
+gentlemen. "The shoulder-rest is detachable, and you can buy an
+effective weapon for a trifle over fifteen dollars, as---- Hello, Teddy,
+how's business?" he added, suddenly, on observing his friend, and the
+two had an opportunity for conversation, while the curious ones were
+examining the rifle.
+
+Teddy gave a brief account of what had already been done, and then
+asked:
+
+"Can't you get off a few minutes and go with me to see what Sam is
+doing?"
+
+It was not difficult for Dan to get a short leave of absence, and the
+two went directly to the creek where their acquaintance, who proposed to
+make himself the central figure of the fair, was rowing around in a
+jaunty looking craft.
+
+Sam wore a sailor's shirt, turned away at the throat, and tied with a
+black silk handkerchief, while on the breast of the garment was worked
+the name "Davis Boat and Oar Co., Detroit, Mich." The same legend being
+printed in gold on the band of his straw hat.
+
+Sam had evidently been expecting his friends, for he espied them before
+they reached the shore, and, rowing to the bank, insisted they should
+take a sail.
+
+"Come on, it's all right," he said. "It don't make any difference
+whether I carry passengers or not so long as the boat is kept goin', an'
+I want to show you somethin' fine in the way of rowin'."
+
+Neither of the boys cared very much about accepting the invitation; but
+he was so persistent that they finally stepped on board as the easiest
+manner of settling the matter.
+
+"I tell you what it is, fellers," he said, as he pulled out into the
+stream, "I'm jest makin' things hum around here. These folks have never
+seen any kind of style put into rowin', an' I'm knockin' their eyes
+out."
+
+"Don't give it to them too strong, or they may want to keep you here as
+an ornament after the fair closes, and then the rest of the world would
+suffer," Dan said, with a laugh, and Sam replied:
+
+"You fellers can make fun; but what I say is straight," and then he made
+preparations for giving an exhibition. "Watch me now, an' you'll learn a
+thing or two about boats."
+
+During the next ten minutes he pulled as if in a race, first up and then
+down the stream, until sheer lack of breath forced him to stop.
+
+"I hope you haven't set the keel on fire," Dan said, solicitously.
+"There's no question but that you made good time, though I'm inclined to
+think the build of the boat had considerable to do with the speed. This
+one looks as if she would row herself."
+
+"That's all you know about it. If I hadn't been a first-class hand
+at----"
+
+"See there!" Teddy cried, excitedly, as he pointed toward the shore.
+"That's the man who got my fifteen dollars. Pull in, Sam, an' pull for
+all you are worth!"
+
+The oarsman delayed only long enough to gaze in the direction indicated,
+where he saw the old fakir whom they had met with such great loss at
+Waterville, and then he bent himself to the task.
+
+"Do you believe it will be safe to tackle him after last night?" Dan
+asked.
+
+"I'm going to, and if he don't get away from me I'll ask some of the
+crowd to help me have him arrested," Teddy replied, grimly.
+
+The little craft was a considerable distance from the shore. Sam was so
+excited that he only thought of landing in the shortest possible space
+of time, and instead of keeping a lookout for other boats, rowed
+vigorously, as if he were the only oarsman on the stream.
+
+Teddy and Dan sat motionless, with their eyes fixed on the man, and thus
+it happened that no one on board saw a double ender, in which were three
+ladies and two gentlemen, come around a bend in the creek directly in
+Sam's course.
+
+There was a shout from the bank, three shrill screams of terror, and
+then a crash as the two craft came together with terrific force.
+
+The occupants of both boats were thrown into the water as the frail
+timbers were splintered, and the spectators on the bank acted as if
+panic-stricken.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+_A BRAVE RESCUE._
+
+
+Sam was a fairly good swimmer, and as soon as he found himself in the
+water he struck out for the shore, paying no attention to any one else
+until he had assured his own safety.
+
+One of the gentlemen in the other craft did the same selfish thing,
+while the other, unable to help even himself, was trying to keep his
+head above water by resting his chin on an oar and piece of planking.
+
+The women were in imminent danger of being drowned, for there was no
+other boat near at hand which could be sent to the rescue, and the
+throng of spectators was in that unreasoning state of fear and
+excitement which prevents people from being of any service at such a
+time.
+
+When Teddy and Dan came to the surface after having been thrown from
+their seats, they were within a few feet of each other, and the latter
+asked:
+
+"Can you swim?"
+
+"Yes; don't pay any attention to me, but do what you can toward saving
+those women."
+
+"Will you help me?"
+
+"Of course; but I can't take care of more than one."
+
+Both boats had disappeared, and nothing save a few fragments showed
+where they had gone down.
+
+Teddy thought only of aiding the struggling women, for there was no
+question that the man with the oar could take care of himself, at least
+until those on the bank should be sufficiently composed to do something
+effective, and he swam to the nearest struggling being, clasping her
+firmly under one arm as he said:
+
+"Don't make a row; but keep perfectly quiet, an' I'll take you ashore."
+
+Half-unconscious as she was, the woman attempted to grasp him by the
+neck, and for several seconds he had all he could do to prevent her from
+choking him to death; but after two or three kicks judiciously
+administered, he succeeded in making her understand that her life as
+well as his own depended upon her remaining passive, and from that
+moment all went well.
+
+The employees of the company which had the boats on exhibition flung
+into the water several life-saving arrangements of cork and canvas, and
+by dint of much persuading he induced her to trust to one of these while
+he went to the assistance of Dan, who had been carried beneath the
+surface more than once by the struggles of the woman whom he was trying
+to save.
+
+By this time a boat was brought up from around the point, and as these
+two helpless ones were taken on board both the boys swam to the rescue
+of the last of the party who had sunk beneath the surface for the third
+time.
+
+Teddy, now nearly exhausted by his efforts, was the first to grasp her;
+but if it had not been for Dan the struggle would have been useless,
+since his strength was so far spent that he could not have brought her
+above the water unaided.
+
+By their united efforts, however, she was taken on board the boat in a
+state of unconsciousness, and they made their way to the shore cheered
+by the shouts of the assembled multitude.
+
+Weak, almost exhausted beyond the power to stand upright, they landed a
+few seconds in advance of the craft, and the reception received was
+enough to have nerved stronger men to a semblance of strength.
+
+It was not until they were in the private apartments allotted to the
+Davis Company that either fully understood how weak he was, and then
+willing hands aided them to recuperate.
+
+Hot flannels, warm drinks, and dry clothes were contributed by the
+different exhibitors, until, as Teddy said, they looked like "circus
+clowns;" but they were in fairly good bodily condition, and it appeared
+as if the involuntary bath had done them no real injury.
+
+Outside the building the people were shouting themselves hoarse in
+praise of the two boys who had saved three lives, and Sam stood bowing
+acknowledgments as if he had been the chief actor in the thrilling
+scene.
+
+The difference between the real and the pretended life-savers was
+readily understood, however, when Dan and Teddy made their appearance,
+looking decidedly the worse for their struggles, and the cheers which
+went up would have been ample reward for the most praise-loving person
+in the world.
+
+They looked like anything rather than reputable employees as they
+appeared in the borrowed garments; but as Teddy said, they couldn't stay
+in the building until their clothes were dried, and it was absolutely
+necessary he should attend to his business.
+
+Dan's duties necessitated his remaining near the creek; but Teddy was
+forced to go back to his cane-board, and the crowd which followed him
+was good evidence of the money he would make.
+
+During two hours after he returned from this thrilling adventure the
+cane-board had more customers than could conveniently be attended to,
+and it is safe to say that he then handled a larger amount than he had
+ever before seen.
+
+"At this rate it won't take long to square up things, and you shall have
+a fair portion of the profits, Tim," he said, when there was an
+opportunity for him to speak with his clerk without being overheard by
+the customers.
+
+"It's a lucky thing for us that them boats were smashed," Tim said,
+devoutly, as he handed his employer half a dollar to change. "We might
+have stood here with our tongues hangin' out all day an' never seen a
+quarter of this money if you hadn't known how to swim."
+
+"You are right to a certain extent; but I can't take all the credit of
+this spurt, because more than half the people are trying to get a cane
+for nothing."
+
+"In the same way they thought to swindle Mr. Hazelton out of a watch," Tim
+replied, with a smile; "but we won't fight about what brings trade so
+long as it comes with the cash."
+
+Up to this time Teddy had no very definite idea of how much money had
+been taken in, and he was thinking it would be a good idea to ascertain,
+when a gruff, familiar voice from the rear asked:
+
+"Are the wages of sin as much as they should be?"
+
+Turning quickly he saw Uncle Nathan, and replied:
+
+"I don't know exactly what they should be; but, perhaps, you do."
+
+"Whatever I may know now, I remember that it was not allowed I should
+insult my elders either by plainly spoken words or insinuations," the
+old man said, sternly.
+
+"Neither would I have done such a thing if you had not given me the
+provocation; but when I promised to pay three dollars for the use of
+fifteen one week, you did not seem to think that amount would be the
+wages of sin."
+
+"At the time I had no idea you would conspire with others to rob me of
+my hard-earned savings."
+
+"You know very well, Uncle Nathan, that I haven't done any such thing.
+On the night your store was robbed I staid in the house, and hadn't left
+it when you came to tell us the news."
+
+"Every person of your class has some such excuse ready in case of an
+emergency; but that kind of talk will not do with me. If you meant to do
+the square thing, why was I not told you lost the money I lent you?"
+
+"Because I knew you would raise an awful row, thinking possibly it would
+not be paid back."
+
+"Have I yet any assurance that it will be?" the old man asked, in a
+fury.
+
+"Do you need it now?"
+
+"I always need my own."
+
+"And in this case, if I pay you at once, do you think it right to charge
+me three dollars for the use of fifteen lent two days ago?"
+
+"That was what you promised, and the world gauges a man by the way he
+keeps his word."
+
+"I owe the storekeeper in Waterville thirty dollars; but I told him you
+must be paid first, and so you shall."
+
+"Then give me the money now," Uncle Nathan snarled.
+
+"That is exactly what I am willing to do," Teddy replied, calmly; "but
+if you can't trust me I have reason to be suspicious of you, so give me
+a receipt for the amount, and the matter can be settled."
+
+The old man literally glared at his nephew for an instant, and then,
+eager to have the cash in his possession, he wrote a receipt, handing it
+to the young fakir, as he said, angrily:
+
+"Now, let me see if you can settle the bill."
+
+Since the mishap on the creek, where Teddy had covered himself with
+glory, business had been so good that he had more than twice that
+amount, and, emptying the contents of his money bag on a board, he
+proceeded to select the required sum.
+
+Uncle Nathan watched him jealously, his eyes twinkling enviously, and
+when the money was placed in his hand he counted it twice over before
+delivering up the written acknowledgment.
+
+"Are you certain all this has been honestly earned, Teddy?" he asked,
+gravely.
+
+"How else could I have got it?"
+
+"There are many ways. While I would not be willing to take my oath to
+it, several of these ten-cent pieces look very much like those I lost
+night before last."
+
+"Do you mean to say I had anything to do with robbing your store?" and
+now that this particular debt had been canceled Teddy felt very brave.
+
+"I know that such an amount of money has not been earned honestly, and,
+what is more, my eyes have been opened to the character of your
+friends."
+
+"If you mean Mr. Hazelton, he is as much your friend as mine, for you
+were with him all day Sunday."
+
+"That is exactly who I do mean," Uncle Nathan replied, with provoking
+deliberation. "I have seen his method of doing business since I came
+into this fair, and know he is nothing more than a deliberate swindler."
+
+"But one with whom you were perfectly willing to go into partnership," a
+voice in the rear of Teddy cried sharply, and the jewelry fakir stepped
+directly in front of Uncle Nathan. "I told you exactly how I worked, and
+you offered to put up even money with me, growing angry when I said you
+would be of no use in the business. If it is swindling, you were mighty
+eager to have a hand in the same business."
+
+"I don't want to talk with you," Uncle Nathan said, as he put Teddy's
+eighteen dollars carefully in his pocket.
+
+"Then why do you come around here trying to bully this boy? He had no
+idea of what I was going to do until he saw me work, while you
+understood the whole plan. Make any trouble for him, and I will get up
+here and tell every person who comes along that you wanted to be my
+partner."
+
+"Do it," the old man said, angrily. "After having cheated so many people
+out of their money, who will believe a word you say?"
+
+At the same time, however, Uncle Nathan took good care to leave this
+particular spot, and Hazelton stepped to the rear of the board where he
+could talk privately with Teddy.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+_AN ENCOUNTER._
+
+
+First of all, the jewelry fakir wanted to hear the particulars of the
+accident on the lake, and Teddy began by telling him the primary cause
+of the trouble.
+
+"I reckon all three of us lost our heads when we saw that man; I know I
+did and we were so eager to get on shore that we paid no attention to
+anything else. Have you seen him?"
+
+"Who? Long Jim? No; but the boys say he is here somewhere running the
+swinging ball game."
+
+"What is that?"
+
+"A wooden ball is swung on two short uprights about eight inches apart,
+and between them, in the center, stands a small peg. You pay ten cents
+for the privilege of swinging the ball, and if it hits the peg when it
+comes back after leaving your hand, you get a dollar."
+
+"I should think that would be easy enough to do."
+
+"Well, don't try it with such an idea or you'll go broke mighty quick.
+It looks simple; but it isn't accomplished very often."
+
+"Have you done anything since I left here?"
+
+"Yes, and scooped in as much as I had any right to expect. I don't want
+to spoil to-morrow's business, so sha'n't make another pitch, but will
+spend my time trying to find Jim."
+
+"What good can that do?"
+
+"I still count on making him give back your fifteen dollars, if nothing
+more. I reckon your Uncle Nathan won't try again to get a warrant out
+for us, and so I sha'n't bother my head about learning anything
+regarding the robbery."
+
+"He'll make things just as disagreeable as he can; there's no question
+about that."
+
+"Well, let him, and we'll see who comes out ahead. Trade is beginning to
+pick up, and you'd better attend to your customers."
+
+Hazelton walked away, and from that moment until nearly nightfall Teddy
+had all the business both he and his clerk could attend to.
+
+Nearly every one had something to say about the accident on the creek,
+and the young fakir was forced to tell the story over and over again,
+until he really got tired of repeating the details.
+
+When nearly all of the visitors had left the grounds Teddy made up his
+cash account, and the sum total surprised both himself and Tim.
+
+Including the amount paid Uncle Nathan he had taken in fifty-five
+dollars and twenty cents. Ten per cent. of this was paid to the clerk,
+and he found himself possessed of the magnificent sum of thirty-one
+dollars and seventy cents.
+
+"At this rate we shall be rich before the end of the week," he said, in
+a tone of satisfaction.
+
+"That's a fact; but it don't seem right for me to take so much," Tim
+replied, as he wrapped the five dollars and a half which had been given
+him in his handkerchief.
+
+"That was the agreement, an' we'll stick to it."
+
+"But when you promised ten cents on every dollar neither of us believed
+trade would be half so good."
+
+"You're right; I thought if we got one-third as much business would be
+booming; but that has nothing to do with our bargain. You've hung right
+on here, without even stopping for anything to eat, an' are entitled to
+what you've been paid. Everybody says there'll be a bigger crowd
+to-morrow, an' so we stand a chance to make considerable more. Are you
+going home to-night, or do you count on staying here?"
+
+"I've got to let the folks know where I am, for when I left it was
+allowed I'd be back by sunset. To-morrow I'll come prepared to stay the
+rest of the week."
+
+"There'll be plenty of stages running, an' you can afford to ride both
+ways after this day's work. I want to send some of this money home to
+mother, for it ain't safe to carry so much around with me."
+
+"Am I to take it?"
+
+"Yes, an' you can tell her all that has happened. Ask her to come over
+Thursday, an' see for herself that we're getting rich."
+
+Twenty-five dollars was tied in a bundle with many wrappings of paper,
+and Tim started off, looking almost afraid at being the custodian of so
+much wealth.
+
+It was necessary Teddy should pack up his entire stock until next
+morning, and this he proceeded to do as soon as he was alone. Mr. Sweet
+had given him permission to bring his goods into the museum tent, and
+his only trouble was how everything could be carried without assistance.
+Before he was ready for departure, however, Sam came up, and the
+question of transportation was settled.
+
+"Well, how do you feel now?" Teddy asked, cheerily, for the knowledge
+that he had already taken in nearly enough to pay his debts caused him
+to feel very jolly.
+
+"I allers get the worst of everything," Sam replied, disconsolately.
+"You an' Dan made a big strike when you tumbled into the water, an' I've
+had a blowin' up; come mighty near losin' my job into the bargain."
+
+"Why?"
+
+"'Cause the boss says that I was careless an' reckless, an' that I
+couldn't earn enough in a month to pay for the two boats I've smashed."
+
+"Are they lost entirely?"
+
+"No, of course not. We pulled 'em out a little while ago, an' it cost so
+very much to fix both. The folks in the other boat were as much to blame
+as me."
+
+"They certainly were not keeping any better lookout, and, as a matter of
+fact, I suppose I'm more at fault than any one else, for if I hadn't
+sung out about the fakir it wouldn't have happened."
+
+"That's what I told the boss; but he's chuck full of foolish talk about
+the bravery he says you an' Dan showed, an' is tryin' to get up what he
+calls a testimonial for you."
+
+"A what?" Teddy cried, in surprise.
+
+"I heard him say testimonial; but if you know what that means you can go
+to the head."
+
+"I don't, and I hope it won't amount to anything. I've been paid enough
+for what was done by the boom it gave my business."
+
+"Of course, you an' Dan are bound to have the best end of it."
+
+"Why didn't you stop an' do the same thing?"
+
+"'Cause I had sense enough to look out for myself first."
+
+"But you know how to swim."
+
+"What of that? It's mighty risky catchin' hold of people in the water,
+an' I don't mean to take any chances. How much have you made to-day?"
+
+When Teddy told him, the expert in rowing looked decidedly envious.
+
+"You've got all that money in one day?"
+
+"Yes; but I sent the most of it home to mother."
+
+"It's funny what luck some folks have, when them as knows the business
+twice as well don't much more'n earn their salt," Sam said, as if to
+himself, and before he could continue Dan arrived.
+
+He wore his own clothes, and carried those Teddy had left in the
+boat-house.
+
+"These were dry, so I brought 'em up. You needn't carry back the ones
+you borrowed till to-morrow, so Sam's boss says."
+
+Then Dan asked concerning business, and by the time all three had
+finished discussing this very important matter the knives and canes were
+packed ready for removal.
+
+Each boy took a load, carried it to the tent where Mr. Sweet was
+figuring up his receipts for the day, and then went to supper, returning
+half an hour later so tired that there was no desire on the part of
+either to do anything other than sleep.
+
+The proprietor of the museum was in very good spirits. He had taken in
+one hundred and six dollars and eighty cents, and said, in a tone of
+satisfaction:
+
+"I reckon this fair will pan out all right. Trade is bound to be better
+to-morrow, and Thursday is always the biggest of the week. I hear you
+boys have been distinguishing yourselves. Tell me about it."
+
+Dan related the incident of the day very modestly, interrupted now and
+then by Sam, who was eager to pose as a hero also, and Mr. Sweet
+expressed himself as being well satisfied with their behavior.
+
+"Chasing a thief and getting a whipping in the night, and then saving
+the lives of three people the next day is record enough for one week, so
+you'd better not try for any more adventures," he said, with a laugh.
+
+Now that the incident of the previous night had been spoken of so
+openly, it was necessary Sam's curiosity should be satisfied, and Dan
+was forced to tell the story.
+
+While he was doing so, and listening to the oarsman's comments, Teddy
+had an opportunity to see the "barker" and clown who arrived that
+morning. Neither was a very prepossessing-looking man. They were lying
+on the ground some distance from the boys, as if bent on minding their
+own business, and there was no real reason for an unfavorable opinion
+concerning them.
+
+But little time was spent in conversation on this evening. Every one was
+thoroughly tired, and each sought for a soft spot on which to pass the
+night.
+
+As before, Sam crawled up on the wagon to be out of harm's way when the
+goat should be unfastened, while Dan and Teddy lay down in very nearly
+the same place as before.
+
+"I don't fancy we shall hear many secrets between now and morning, no
+matter how many men come around here to talk," the former said,
+laughingly. "It won't take me two minutes to fall asleep, and the noise
+that can awaken me then will have to be very great."
+
+Teddy's only reply was a yawn, and in even less time than Dan had
+mentioned he was wrapped in slumber.
+
+Shortly after the proprietor of the exhibition began to make his
+preparations for retiring, and the clown asked:
+
+"How did that row start this afternoon?"
+
+"Half a dozen of the village toughs tried to get in without paying, and
+I had to polish one of 'em off," the barker replied.
+
+"You must have done it pretty quick, for when I got out there the thing
+was over," Mr. Sweet said.
+
+"The fellow was more than half-drunk, an' it wasn't a very big job. They
+threaten to come back and clean the whole show out."
+
+"Yes, I've heard such threats made before; but never lost much sleep
+worrying about it."
+
+Ten minutes later all the human occupants of the tent were enjoying a
+well-earned rest, and the goat had about concluded it would be a
+profitless job to prospect for anything more to eat, when the sound of
+footsteps could have been heard from the outside.
+
+Had Mr. Sweet been awake he would have decided that these late visitors
+were trying to find the flap of the tent, for they walked cautiously
+around the canvas twice, and then a sharp knife was thrust through the
+fabric.
+
+An instant later Sam awoke his companion with a yell that would have
+done credit to any Indian.
+
+Some one had given him such a blow as sent him from the seat to the
+ground, and the remainder of the party leaped to their feet only to be
+confronted by a large party of half-drunken toughs who had come to
+avenge the insult received during the afternoon.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+_LONG JIM_.
+
+
+Teddy's first thought when he was awakened by Sam's yells was that the
+officers of the law were coming to arrest him for the robbery committed
+at Uncle Nathan's store; but in a very few seconds he understood that
+this was not the case.
+
+He and Dan had been sleeping some distance from the remainder of the
+company; therefore, when the hand-to-hand struggle began they were out
+of it entirely, and owing to the darkness could not be seen by the
+assailants; but Sam's cries served to show the mob where he was, and one
+after another pounded him when they failed to find any of the other
+occupants.
+
+While one might have counted twenty Teddy and Dan stood motionless,
+undecided as to what should be done, while the din caused by the
+combatants and the screaming boy were almost deafening, and then the
+latter said:
+
+"We've got to take a hand in this row, Teddy. Mr. Sweet has given us the
+chance to sleep here, and the least we can do is to help as much as
+possible, for it appears to me that his men are getting the worst of
+it."
+
+A broken tent-peg was lying on the ground near at hand, and Dan added,
+as he seized it:
+
+"Try to light one of the lanterns so we can see which is an enemy, and
+then sail in."
+
+It seemed to Teddy as if he would never be able to follow these
+instructions. He had plenty of matches; but in his excitement one after
+another was extinguished until he fancied half an hour must have elapsed
+before the wick was ignited.
+
+The faint glow of light served to show one of the intruders Teddy's
+form, and the latter had but just succeeded in hanging the lantern on
+the center-pole when it became necessary to defend himself.
+
+The drunken bully made a lunge at him, which he managed to avoid by
+jumping aside, and in another instant he had seized the man by the
+waist, doing his best to throw him.
+
+From this moment Teddy knew nothing more of the row than that portion in
+which he was immediately concerned. He was able to prevent the man from
+striking by hugging close to his body, and the two swayed here and there
+in the effort to gain the mastery. Now and then they came in contact
+with the other combatants, one or both receiving a chance blow, but no
+especial injury was done to either.
+
+Had the man been sober, Teddy must have been overcome in a very short
+time; but as he was far from being steady on his feet the odds were
+about even, and the boy succeeded in holding his own until the others
+had retreated or been so disabled that it was no longer possible for
+them to continue the assault.
+
+Fully thirty minutes had elapsed from the time Sam first sounded the
+alarm before the occupants of the tent could count themselves as
+victors, and then Mr. Sweet and the clown pulled Teddy's adversary away,
+throwing him bodily out of the tent after administering summary
+punishment.
+
+During all this time the other exhibitors who intended to sleep on the
+grounds had been gathering around the canvas, but no one cared to risk
+his precious body by entering until it was certain the battle had been
+ended.
+
+Then the tent was filled with sympathizing friends, who endeavored to
+ascertain the amount of injury done, but were interrupted in the work by
+the proprietor, who cried, angrily:
+
+"Clear out of here, every mother's son! You didn't dare to come in when
+it would have been possible to help us, and there's no need of you now.
+We were attacked by a crowd of men from the town, who proposed to clean
+the show out because we wouldn't let them in free, and that's all there
+is to it."
+
+Not until the last visitor had unwillingly departed did the little
+party pay any attention to their wounds, and then the result of the
+engagement was ascertained.
+
+The barker had a broken nose, but it would not prevent him from doing a
+full share of talking on the following day. The clown's eye looked
+rather bad, and Mr. Sweet's cheek had been cut, but these were only
+trifling mishaps. Teddy had come out of the affray comparatively
+uninjured; Dan showed nothing worse than a bruise under the left ear,
+and while Sam appeared to be unscathed, he declared that he had been
+pounded until every inch of his body felt like jelly.
+
+"You squealed fairly well for a fellow who was so badly done up," Mr.
+Sweet said, with a laugh, as he proceeded to dress the barker's wounded
+nose, "and I reckon you'll be all right by morning. Light some of the
+other lanterns so I can see what I'm about, and during the remainder of
+the night we'll stand guard, for no one can say how soon those
+scoundrels may attempt to pay us a second visit, although I think they
+had a full dose this time."
+
+How the assailants had fared no one was able to form a very good
+opinion. The general belief among the occupants of the tent, however,
+was that they had received such severe punishment that there would be no
+further attack on this night, at least.
+
+When the wounds had been dressed, Mr. Sweet said, as he took up a
+position near the flap:
+
+"You fellows had better try to go to sleep now. I'll keep awake for a
+while, and then call some one to relieve me. Dan, can't you borrow one
+of those queer-looking rifles you are exhibiting, and bring it with you
+to-morrow night?"
+
+"I might get the one I use for shooting at a target; but you wouldn't
+think of trying to kill a man, would you, Mr. Sweet?"
+
+"I could do a good deal toward scaring them, and if a crowd insisted on
+forcing an entrance, I'd take mighty good care that one would carry away
+a bullet to remember me by."
+
+"I'll bring the rifle," Dan replied, and Teddy whispered:
+
+"When I came here to run a cane-board I didn't count on being obliged to
+do any fighting."
+
+"I don't reckon there'll be much more here. The managers of the fair
+will see to it that those fellows are put where they can't do any
+additional mischief, for the exhibitors must be protected, and we shall
+be safe enough, except something else comes up to make a row."
+
+Then the sore, tired party lay down in search of slumber once more, and,
+strange as it may seem after the exciting events, all save the sentinel
+were soon wrapped again in slumber.
+
+Each in turn was aroused to do his share of guard duty before morning
+came; but no enemy appeared, and at sunrise the three boys went across
+the grounds to the boarding-house, where, as Dan said: "The price was
+twice as big as the breakfast."
+
+Teddy had his place of business ready for the reception of customers
+before the first stage-load of visitors arrived, and when Tim came he
+had already taken in nearly a dollar.
+
+"What's the news?" he asked, as the clerk appeared, looking radiant and
+happy at the thought of earning as much money as on the previous day.
+
+"Your mother was pretty nigh wild when I told her what we took in
+yesterday, an' says she'll be here sure on Thursday. There's no more
+news of your Uncle Nathan's goods, an' he's still tryin' to have you
+arrested; but your mother says not to be afraid, 'cause she has talked
+with a lawyer, an' don't think there'll be any trouble. I told the folks
+at home that the old skinflint made you pay three dollars interest on
+the money what was stole, an' everybody in town will know it before
+night."
+
+Tim was forced to stop his story to wait upon a party of young gentlemen
+who were eager to get dollar canes for five cents, and the booths
+adjoining Teddy's place of business had not yet been opened when he
+announced that there were four dollars in the money box.
+
+"We're bound to have a big day," Tim said, confidently. "The band from
+the Run is comin' over this mornin', an' if the city people hear about
+it you bet they'll jest crowd in to hear the music. There'll be [----]
+of the boys to see you, but take my advice an' don't let 'em have any
+rings on credit, for I wouldn't trust the best of the whole lot at fair
+time. I'm goin' to stay till Friday; do you s'pose that man will let me
+sleep in his tent with you fellers?"
+
+Teddy promised to inquire, and then advised Tim to have a look at the
+grounds before business began to be rushing, and the clerk was glad to
+take advantage of the proposition.
+
+He started off with the air of one who owned the entire inclosure, and
+was hardly lost to view amid the fast-gathering throng when Teddy was
+literally dazed by seeing Long Jim, the very man who had robbed him in
+Waterville, lounging along toward his stand.
+
+Not until the fakir stood directly in front of the boy did he appear to
+recognize him, and then he would have turned quickly away but for the
+latter's cry:
+
+"Somebody hold that man till I get a constable! He stole my money."
+
+Realizing that a flight across the grounds with hundreds of men and boys
+crying "Stop thief!" in full pursuit would be disastrous, Long Jim
+turned to face his young accuser.
+
+"What do you mean by saying such a thing?" he asked, angrily. "If you
+wasn't so small I'd make you eat the words."
+
+"I was big enough for you to steal from, and I want my money."
+
+It was only natural that a crowd should gather after such an accusation,
+and Long Jim looked around for some means of escape, but, realizing that
+he could not well get away while so many were near, he stepped close to
+Teddy, as he whispered:
+
+"If you say another word I'll smash your face, you young whelp! Hold
+your tongue if you want to leave here alive."
+
+"I'll say exactly what's true. Give me my money, or I'll find some one
+to have you arrested!"
+
+"The boy is a liar, and, what is more, has just robbed his uncle's
+store, if what they say over at the Run be true," the fakir said,
+excitedly, as he turned to face the crowd. "I don't want to hurt him;
+but I won't be insulted by a thief, so the best thing for me to do is to
+leave."
+
+Saying this, he walked deliberately away, and the curious ones, who a
+moment previous had been friendly to Teddy, began to sympathize with the
+man.
+
+"Don't let him off!" the boy cried, starting to follow, and then
+remembering that he would be forced to leave his wares at the mercy of
+the crowd, turned back, while Long Jim continued straight across the
+grounds unmolested.
+
+"It looks like it was a case of the pot calling the kettle black," an
+old farmer said, and his immediate circle of friends laughed heartily,
+while the younger portion of the crowd gazed earnestly at Teddy,
+believing they saw before them a fullfledged burglar.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+_A DISCOVERY._
+
+
+With feelings of mingled anger, vexation and disappointment, Teddy stood
+silent and motionless for several moments after Long Jim disappeared,
+striving to keep the tears from his eyes.
+
+It seemed hard enough to be swindled out of fifteen dollars, but to be
+held up as a thief by the very man who had done him the wrong, and to be
+stared at as a criminal by the curious, was an aggravation of
+misfortune.
+
+Just for one instant he made up his mind to tell the whole story to the
+bystanders, but before there was time for him to speak he realized that
+many of them would think he was trying to shield himself by an untruth
+against just accusations, therefore he remained quiet, not making the
+slightest effort to influence trade.
+
+Fortunately he was soon aroused from this very disagreeable frame of
+mind by a very pleasing incident.
+
+The band from the Run arrived, and to the young fakir's surprise marched
+directly to his booth, the leader saying, in a tone sufficiently loud to
+be heard by every one in the immediate vicinity as the musicians halted
+about ten feet away:
+
+"We have been hired to play on the grounds to-day, Teddy, and left home
+half an hour earlier than the specified time for the sole purpose of
+giving you a serenade to show that, whatever your uncle may say, the
+folks at the Run are positive there isn't a shadow of truth in his
+ridiculous story. We know what you are working for, and intend to help
+you along as much as possible."
+
+Then the musicians began to play, while, as a matter of course, every
+one who came up wanted to know why the band was there instead of on the
+stand built for its especial accommodation, and there were people enough
+who had heard the leader's remarks to explain matters to the newcomers.
+
+The immediate result was that instead of believing him to be a burglar,
+the same ones who fancied a few moments previous that he looked guilty,
+were now quite positive he was a victim.
+
+Tim arrived while the serenade was in progress, and when Teddy explained
+the situation, he exclaimed, gleefully:
+
+"Well, by jinks! This jest knocks the spots outer everything! Trade will
+hum after this, or I'm a duffer."
+
+And the clerk's prediction was verified in a very short time.
+
+When the musicians had concluded the concert they laid aside their
+instruments, and during the next ten minutes every man of them threw
+rings at the canes or knives so rapidly that both Teddy and his
+assistant had all they could do to wait upon the throng.
+
+Then, giving the signal for the march to be resumed, the leader said to
+the young fakir:
+
+"Don't get discouraged, my boy, no matter what happens. If you have any
+trouble it can't last long, for you've plenty of friends at the Run, and
+after what happened here yesterday there should be a good many on the
+grounds."
+
+The kind-hearted musicians marched away without giving Teddy an
+opportunity to thank them, and as if to atone for their previously
+spoken harsh words the bystanders devoted themselves with unusual zest
+to the task of winning a cane worth a dollar by an outlay of five cents.
+
+It was nearly an hour before trade began to grow dull again, and both
+the boys were quite willing to rest a few moments.
+
+"At this rate we stand a chance of getting rich before the fair closes,"
+Teddy exclaimed, in a tone of satisfaction. "I wonder what Uncle Nathan
+would have said if he'd been here to hear the leader?"
+
+"I'll tell you," a disagreeable but familiar sounding voice replied from
+the rear of the stand where its owner had been concealed by an adjoining
+booth, and Nathan Hargreaves stalked into view with a comically tragic
+air. "Things have come to a pretty pass when a man's own relations, an'
+them as he has set up in business with his own hard-earned money, try to
+bring scorn and reproach upon him. You are a snake in the grass, Teddy
+Hargreaves, an' not content with helpin' rob me, concoct such a
+disgraceful scene as I have jest witnessed."
+
+"What could I have had to do with it?" Teddy cried, in surprise. "I
+didn't know they were going to give me a lift."
+
+"Of course you did; I ain't blind if I am such a fool as to put you in
+the way of makin' so much money. There wasn't a man in that band who'd
+have countenanced the speech the leader made if you hadn't been workin'
+on their sympathies. But your race won't be much longer. Don't think
+that I've stopped all proceedings, for it may be that you're shoved into
+jail this very day unless you make a clean breast of the whole thing."
+
+"I've got nothing to tell simply because I don't know anything; but I
+believe the same man who took my fifteen dollars robbed your store. Dan
+and I heard him and another fellow talking, and in trying to find out
+something for your benefit got knocked down."
+
+"What did they say? Who are they?" the old man asked, eagerly, his
+bearing toward Teddy changing very suddenly. "Tell me! Tell your poor,
+old uncle, who'll be mighty near the poor-house, if he don't get his own
+again."
+
+This appeal touched Teddy's heart immediately, but Tim said, half to
+himself, taking good care Uncle Nathan should hear him, however:
+
+"More'n a hundred robberies like that wouldn't make him poor. Why, down
+at the Run folks say you'd hardly miss what's been taken."
+
+"Those who make that kind of talk are only shiftless people with never a
+dollar of their own, consequently they don't know the value of one," the
+old man cried, angrily. "It's all very well for a set of loafers who are
+mad with me because I wouldn't give them credit to say such things. Do
+you suppose I'd spend my time runnin' around the country huntin' for the
+thieves if I hadn't lost a power of money?"
+
+"You'd be willin' to run pretty far if there was a nickel at the end of
+the road," Tim retorted, but before he could say anything more Teddy
+motioned for him to be silent.
+
+"Are you goin' to tell me who the robbers are?" Uncle Nathan asked, in a
+wheedling tone, as he turned once more toward his nephew.
+
+"I don't know the men whom I suspect, except by sight, but it's more
+than possible we may find out enough to warrant their arrest before the
+fair closes."
+
+The old man insisted on knowing at once, and alternately coaxed and
+threatened, but all to no purpose.
+
+Teddy positively refused to make a statement until he had more proof,
+and recognizing the fact that he might hurt his own cause by insisting,
+Uncle Nathan said, in a most affectionate tone:
+
+"I must go now, Teddy, but I'll see you again before night. If you'll do
+all you can to help find them scoundrels I'll never say that you had
+anything to do with the crime."
+
+"You'd no business to make any such talk, for you knew it was impossible
+for me to take any hand in it, even if I'd wanted to be a thief."
+
+"There's a good deal of circumstantial evidence," the old man said,
+solemnly, as he turned to leave, "an' it stands you in hand to do all a
+boy can to clear your own skirts. I'm goin' to give you a chance, an'
+promise there won't be any arrest made to-day at all events."
+
+"There's a good reason why you promise that," Tim cried, angrily, as
+Uncle Nathan walked away. "You tried mighty hard, but couldn't get a
+warrant, an' there ain't a justice of the peace between here an'
+Waterville as would grant one without any other evidence than what you
+can say."
+
+"Don't make him angry, Tim. He's feeling bad about his money, an' you
+can't blame him for trying to find out who has got it."
+
+"I don't blame him for that, but what I'm kickin' about is that he
+keeps naggin' at you when there's no reason for it."
+
+"Most likely he thinks there is."
+
+"He can't; it's only the wretched old skinflint's way of gettin' even
+with the world, an' so he picks on a feller what he believes can't
+strike back."
+
+"I wish I could find out who the robbers are, and where the goods have
+been hidden."
+
+"Well, I don't. It serves him right to lose 'em, an'---- Hello! here
+comes that feller what helps exhibit the rifles! I wonder what he wants
+at this time of day, jest when business is beginnin' to be rushin'."
+
+Dan was evidently in a high state of excitement, for he forced his way
+through the crowds, regardless of possible injury to himself or others,
+and did not slacken speed until he stood in front of the cane-board,
+breathless and panting.
+
+"What's up?" Teddy asked, in surprise.
+
+"The fakir who got your money, an' another man, who I think is the same
+one we heard talkin' outside the tent, have jest bought a boat from the
+Davis Company. Sam saw 'em, an' ran over to tell me while the bargain
+was bein' made. He's watchin' down there till we can get back."
+
+"I don't believe it would do any good for me to say another word to Long
+Jim. He went past here this mornin', an' I only made a bad matter worse
+by trying to make him give back what he stole."
+
+"We ain't countin' on doin' that, but I believe they're gettin' ready to
+cart away the goods what were stole from your Uncle Nathan. Perhaps we
+can foller without bein' seen, an' get on to the whole snap. Could you
+get off for the balance of the day?"
+
+And now Teddy was quite as excited as Dan.
+
+"Yes, an' so can Sam."
+
+"Are you goin' to help find his goods after all that old duffer has
+threatened?" Tim asked, impatiently.
+
+"I'll do what I can," was the decided reply. "Do you think you will be
+able to get along alone to-day?"
+
+"I could do it easy enough by hirin' a boy to pick up the rings, but I
+hate to see you make a fool of yourself, Teddy."
+
+"You'll think different later. Come on, Dan. I'll be back as soon as I
+can, Tim," and then the young fakir urged his friend in the direction of
+the creek.
+
+"It won't do to go anywhere near the boat-house," Dan said. "Sam is up
+the bank a long piece where the willows hide him. He's keepin' his eye
+on the craft they bought, so it can't be taken away without his seein'
+it."
+
+By mingling with the crowd it was possible to make their way to the
+desired spot without being seen, save by those with whom they came into
+immediate contact, and in a few moments the watcher was joined by his
+friends.
+
+"Now I want you fellers to let me manage this case," Sam said,
+pompously. "I know more 'bout detective business than both of you put
+together, an' if you'd only told me what was up the other night we'd had
+the whole thing settled."
+
+"Have you seen the men?" Dan asked, impatiently.
+
+"Lots of times. The old fakir is loafin' around close by the landin',
+an' the other one must 'a gone off for somethin'. The Davis Company told
+me I could take any of the boats, an' the minute the thieves start we'll
+jump right on their trail."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+_AMATEUR DETECTIVES._
+
+
+It was fated that the thrilling work of running down and capturing the
+thieves should not be begun until after considerable delay.
+
+"Now, I wonder what he is up to?" Dan said, when it was no longer
+possible to see the supposed burglar.
+
+"Why is it that you can't let me do this thing?" Sam asked, angrily. "If
+you keep meddlin' we'll never fix matters."
+
+"I don't see that I'm interfering," Dan replied, in surprise.
+
+The three boys watched this one particular boat in silence for ten
+minutes or more, seeing Long Jim now and then, and just as they believed
+he was about to step on board the man walked toward the exhibition
+buildings, and was soon lost to view amid the throng of people.
+
+"You was gettin' ready, too, I could tell that by your eye."
+
+"I'll have to give in that you're the smartest feller in this section of
+the country, Sam, an' that's a fact."
+
+"Of course it is," the amateur detective replied, complacently, thinking
+Dan's sarcasm was really praise. "If I have my own way I can turn up the
+biggest thief that ever walked on two legs; but you mustn't bother me,
+or things may go wrong."
+
+If the matter had not been so serious to him Teddy would have laughed
+long and often at the dignity and superior knowledge assumed by this
+fellow, who, since he made his acquaintance, had done nothing more
+difficult than to get himself into trouble; but, under the
+circumstances, he was so deeply interested in the outcome of the
+business that there was no room in his mind for mirth.
+
+"Dan," he said, "let you and I walk around two or three minutes. We'll
+stay close by so that Sam can give us the signal in case the men show
+up, and we may find Hazelton."
+
+"Don't tell him what we're doin'," the amateur detective cried, sharply.
+
+"Why not?"
+
+"'Cause it's likely he'll want to meddle with our business, an' then my
+work will be spoiled."
+
+"I won't say a word to him until after seeing you again," Teddy replied
+as he led Dan away, and added when they were where it would be
+impossible for Sam to hear them: "See here, it's foolish for us to think
+of trying to follow those men if he's to be allowed to make a fool of
+himself. With him believing he's the greatest detective in the country,
+something wrong is sure to happen, an' we may never get another chance
+of finding out about the burglary."
+
+"Don't fret about that," Dan replied, confidently. "It won't do any harm
+to let him swell a little now while he's keeping watch; but when the
+real work begins it won't take long to sit on him."
+
+"Then there will be a row."
+
+"I'll attend to his case; but I don't think there'll be anything for us
+to do yet awhile. The men are evidently in no hurry to leave, and most
+likely intend to wait till the crowd begins to go."
+
+"Then why should all three of us stay on watch?"
+
+"We won't. Go back to your cane-board, and I'll tell Sam to come for you
+when the burglars put in an appearance. He'll have time to do that, an'
+while he's gettin' a boat ready you can come for me."
+
+"Will it be safe to trust him?"
+
+"Yes, indeed," Dan replied, with a laugh. "He's havin' an awful good
+time thinkin' he's the greatest detective in the world, and couldn't be
+hired to leave that clump of willows so long as the men keep out of
+sight."
+
+Teddy was not so confident, and insisted on going back with Dan while
+the arrangement was made.
+
+When the matter was explained Sam appeared to be perfectly satisfied.
+
+"That's all right," he said, readily. "I can see to this thing alone;
+but I'll let you fellers know the minute anything happens. Don't tell
+any of the constables what I'm up to, or they'll want to have a finger
+in the pie."
+
+Convinced that he would be informed of any change in the situation,
+Teddy returned to the cane-board just in time to aid Tim in attending to
+a rush of customers who were spending their money liberally.
+
+"What made you come back?" the clerk asked, in surprise. "I've hired a
+feller for a quarter to pick up rings, an' am gettin' along first rate."
+
+Teddy briefly explained the condition of affairs, and then there was
+little opportunity for conversation until considerably past noon, when
+trade dropped off very decidedly for a while.
+
+In order that he might have a glimpse of the other fakirs and rest
+himself at the same time, Tim was sent to see if Sam was yet at his
+self-selected post of duty, and Teddy took advantage of the opportunity
+to ascertain the amount of his receipts.
+
+To his great surprise he found nearly forty dollars in the money-box,
+and from this he took thirty with which to pay the merchant in
+Waterville who had given him credit for his stock.
+
+"It has turned out to be a mighty good venture, even if Aunt Sarah was
+so sure I'd make a fool of myself by tryin' it. All the money I make now
+will be clear profit, and it looks as if I'd be able to help mother
+quite a bit."
+
+[Illustration: "They're getting ready to start!" he said, breathlessly.]
+
+"Well, how is business?" a voice asked, in a cheery tone, and, looking
+up, Teddy saw his sole remaining creditor.
+
+"I'm glad you've come," he cried, bundling the thirty dollars up in a
+piece of paper. "I'd jest counted this out for you, an' when you take it
+I'll be free from debt."
+
+"But I don't want the money," the merchant replied. "I only came around
+to see if you were successful."
+
+"I've already made more than I reckoned on, an' it'll be a favor if you
+take this, 'cause I don't like to have so much around."
+
+Then Teddy explained the condition of his business affairs, not
+forgetting to tell of the accusation made against him by his Uncle
+Nathan, and the merchant said, as he concluded:
+
+"I heard the whole story, my boy, and have already talked with Mr.
+Hargreaves, whom I met a few moments ago. I do not think he can do
+anything to you, because you have made many friends here. The money I
+will take, as it is not well to keep it where it might be stolen; but
+can give you no receipt until I get home."
+
+"That'll be all right," Teddy replied, contentedly; "you trusted me with
+the goods, an' it would be funny if I couldn't wait for a receipted
+bill. It's through you that I've had the chance to make so much, an' I
+want you to know I feel grateful."
+
+"I believe that, and am more than pleased to have put you in the way of
+getting a start in the world. Come to see me when the fair closes, and
+it is possible I may show you an opportunity of learning to be a
+merchant on a large scale, rather than a fakir whose method of getting a
+living is very precarious, regardless of the fact that he sometimes
+makes very great profits."
+
+It can be readily understood that Teddy accepted the invitation, and
+then, trade commencing once more, the gentleman walked away, leaving the
+proprietor of the cane-board with the pleasing consciousness that he was
+free from debt, and with quite a large amount of money in his mother's
+keeping.
+
+Tim returned very shortly after the merchant's departure, and reported
+that Sam was still on duty.
+
+"The boat hasn't been moved nor have the men showed up again," he said.
+"That feller acts as if he thought he was bigger than the President. He
+told me he could be the greatest detective that ever lived if it wasn't
+that folks made him show off at rowin' 'cause he had so much style about
+him. I don't think he's so very wonderful; but, of course, I never saw
+many out an' out detectives."
+
+"And you don't see one when you met him. I'm sure he'll get Dan an' me
+in trouble before this thing is ended."
+
+"Then why don't you let him go off alone? That's what I'd do with such a
+chump."
+
+"I can't, because----"
+
+The sentence was not concluded, for at that moment Dan came up at full
+speed.
+
+"They're gettin' ready to start!" he said, breathlessly. "I saw 'em go
+by the buildin', an' run over to tell Sam that I'd fetch you. Our boat
+is a long distance up the creek, an' we'll have to hurry, or run the
+chance of missing their craft."
+
+There was no delay on Teddy's part, despite the misgivings he had
+regarding Sam.
+
+One parting injunction to Tim on the subject of business, and then he
+followed Dan at full speed toward the creek on such a course as would
+bring them fully a quarter of a mile above the boat-house outside the
+fair grounds.
+
+Sam had made everything ready for the journey by the time they arrived,
+and was so excited that he could no longer speak of his own wonderful
+powers as a thief-catcher.
+
+"One of you fellers had better row while I steer," he said, seating
+himself in the stern sheets and taking the tiller-ropes. "If they see
+the way I handle the oars they'll know exactly who's after them, an'
+then the game'll be up."
+
+"Don't worry yourself about that," Dan replied, calmly. "Neither Teddy
+nor I knows anything about a boat, except it may be to steer, so you'll
+have to hump yourself."
+
+Sam grumbled considerably about taking so many risks; but he finally
+moved over to the bow and his companions took their seats aft.
+
+"I won't put any style to it, an', perhaps, that'll keep 'em from
+knowin' I'm on their trail," he said, and immediately began rowing in
+such a bungling fashion that Dan said, sharply:
+
+"Look here, if you're goin' to pull this boat, do it, or we'll go back.
+At this rate, you'll have everybody at the fair watching to see what
+kind of chumps have been allowed to risk their lives. We've got no time
+to spare, either; for we must get on the other side of the creek where
+it will be possible to watch the men without getting too near."
+
+"I'll take care of that part of the business," Sam replied, loftily, and
+Dan immediately put into operation his plan of "sitting" on the amateur
+detective.
+
+"You do your share, and that will be enough. Teddy and I propose to take
+a hand in this ourselves."
+
+"Then I might as well go back."
+
+"You can, if you want to."
+
+It so chanced that he had no such desire, and with the air of one whose
+feelings have been deeply wounded he rowed steadily on, Dan steering,
+until they were where it was possible to have a full view of a long
+stretch of the creek.
+
+[Illustration: "There they are!" Teddy said.]
+
+"There they are!" Teddy said, pointing down stream to where a boat was
+being pulled close to the left bank. "They have stopped, and it looks as
+if something was being taken on board!"
+
+"It is a portion of the goods they stole!" Dan cried. "Stop rowing, Sam,
+and if nothing happens we'll soon know where the whole lot is to be
+hidden."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+_THE RENDEZVOUS._
+
+
+That Dan's surmise was correct could be seen a few moments after, while
+the boys, partially concealed by the overhanging bank, watched the
+proceedings with but little danger of being discovered.
+
+On the shore were a number of packages in a cart, and these the supposed
+burglars loaded into the boat with the utmost haste.
+
+If this lot comprised all that had been taken from Uncle Nathan his loss
+must have been greater than he stated, and Teddy said, after watching
+several moments in silence:
+
+"I reckon this is only part of what they took; but I'm puzzled to know
+how it could have been brought so far. The idea of carting goods over
+here to find a place in which to hide them is a queer one, when all the
+thieves had to do was slip down the river in a skiff, an' before morning
+they'd be beyond reach of the officers."
+
+It surely was strange that the men should have done so much useless
+labor, and the only solution to the apparent mystery was offered by Sam,
+who said, with an air of superior wisdom:
+
+"They've done it to throw me off the scent. That fakir we saw in
+Waterville must have known who I was."
+
+"How does it happen he had the nerve to come here when he knew you
+counted on showing the people who visited this fair your skill in
+rowing?" Dan asked, with a laugh.
+
+"I reckon he didn't think I was tellin' the truth."
+
+It was useless to attempt to make Sam acquainted with himself. He had
+such a remarkable idea of his own abilities, despite the scrapes he was
+constantly getting into, that the most eloquent orator would have been
+unable to convince him he was anything more than a very egotistical boy,
+with little save his vanity to recommend him to the notice of the
+general public.
+
+In five minutes the boat at the opposite bank had received as much of a
+cargo as her owners wished to carry, and then the men began to row
+leisurely down the river.
+
+"Now, go slow, Sam, and don't turn around to look, or they may suspect
+we are following them," Dan said, warningly. "I'll keep you posted about
+what they are doing, and you can tell us afterward what ought to have
+been done. Pull moderately, for we don't want to get very near while it
+is light enough for them to see us."
+
+The chase was not a long one. By keeping the boat's head to the bank and
+moving leisurely as boys who were bent only on pleasure might have
+done, the pursuers evidently caused no suspicions as to their purpose,
+and after about a mile had been traversed the burglars turned up a
+narrow waterway which led to a barn or shed built on the meadows for the
+storing of marsh hay.
+
+There were plenty of ditches near at hand into which the amateur
+detectives could run their craft unobserved, and as the pursued left the
+creek Dan steered into one of these.
+
+Here their heads hardly came above the bank, and all three could see the
+men carrying their cargo to the building.
+
+"We've got 'em now," said Sam, triumphantly, as the first of the
+packages was taken on shore, "an' the sooner we nab both the better."
+
+"How do you intend to set about such a job?" Teddy asked.
+
+"Go right up an' tell 'em we've been on their track."
+
+"And in less than two minutes you would get a worse pounding than the
+toughs gave you last night."
+
+Sam appeared to realize the truth of this statement, for he had no
+further suggestions to offer, and Dan said, after some reflection:
+
+"I think the best thing we can do will be to go back to the fair. If
+those fellows find us here the jig will be up; but it isn't likely
+they've got the whole of their plunder with them, and intend to come
+here again. We'll talk with some one and find out a good plan, or keep
+our eyes peeled to learn what they mean to do with the goods. If they
+propose simply to hide them until there is a chance to get the lot away
+safely, we shall have the key to the situation an' can take plenty of
+time deciding what should be done."
+
+Sam did not again propose to make any attempt at intimidating the men,
+and Teddy thought Dan's scheme a wise one.
+
+"They'll come here more than once before the week is ended; you know
+they spoke of moving the stuff when the exhibitors got ready to leave,
+an' we'd better go back to the grounds before those fellows have
+finished their work."
+
+Sam pulled out of the water-course into the creek without a murmur; but
+when they were on the way back, and he felt at liberty to display his
+true "style," courage returned.
+
+"I knew you fellers wasn't any good on detective work," he said,
+scornfully. "If I'd had charge of the case we should have them men tied
+hand an' foot in the bottom of this boat."
+
+"How would you have got 'em there?" Dan asked.
+
+"That's my business. Jest because I've let you into this thing there's
+no reason why I should give all my secrets away, is there?"
+
+"Not a bit of it, an' you keep them locked up in your heart, for if
+Teddy an' I knew the plans we might get into a bad scrape."
+
+"Well, what are you goin' to do now?"
+
+"Nothing until after we have talked with those who know more than we do
+about such things."
+
+Sam immediately relapsed into silence. His superior knowledge had been
+scorned, and he proposed to let his companions understand that he was
+not pleased with them.
+
+By the time the boys reached the bend in the creek they could see the
+boat in which were Long Jim and his companion, half a mile behind, and
+Dan said:
+
+"Those fellows don't know me. When we land you and Sam had better keep
+out of sight, while I try to find out where they go after striking the
+fair ground."
+
+"All right. It's time I helped Tim, an' you'll come to the cane-board if
+there is anything to tell."
+
+"So I don't amount to anything, eh?" Sam asked, sulkily.
+
+"Of course you do; but it would be foolish to make a show of yourself to
+Long Jim, who would remember you. Keep rowing around in the boat as if
+you were at work, and there'll be no chance for suspicion."
+
+By this time the little craft was at the landing stage of the
+boat-house, and two of the party leaped out, leaving the third feeling
+that he had been unjustly deprived of a very large portion of his
+rights.
+
+"If them fellers think they're goin' to get the best of me they're
+makin' a big mistake, an' I'll show 'em so before night. They don't know
+any more about bein' detectives than a cat; but both will be mightily
+surprised before mornin', or I'm mistaken."
+
+Then, instead of rowing around the creek as Dan had suggested, Sam
+pulled out into the middle of the stream, looking wondrous wise and
+determined as he awaited the coming of those whose secret he had
+partially discovered.
+
+Meanwhile Teddy and Dan, without the slightest suspicion of what their
+friend proposed to do, separated at the landing stage, the former making
+all haste to reach his cane-board, where he found Tim doing a thriving
+business, and standing near by was Hazelton.
+
+"Where have you been?" the jewelry fakir asked, solicitously. "I've come
+here two or three times without finding you, and had almost begun to
+believe old Nathan succeeded in getting a warrant."
+
+Teddy was undecided as to whether he should tell this acquaintance of
+all he had seen or not; but, after some deliberation, and in view of the
+fact that he also had been accused of the burglary, concluded to do so.
+
+"We've found out where Long Jim is hiding the stuff he stole from my
+uncle," he said, and then explained what had been done during the last
+hour.
+
+Hazelton was surprised that so much information had been gained; but he
+was able to cause Teddy an equal amount of astonishment.
+
+"I don't believe the packages you saw came from the old man's store. I
+heard, about two hours ago, that a store here in town was robbed last
+night, and it isn't dead sure, after your uncle's accusations, and what
+I have done on the fair grounds, that I sha'n't be arrested on
+suspicion. Most likely the goods taken down the creek were stolen here;
+but I don't understand why those fellows should work so boldly."
+
+"Probably they think, as one of them said the other night, while so many
+articles are being carried to and fro."
+
+"Very likely that may be true, and now comes the question of what shall
+be done regarding the information you have gained. I stand in a mighty
+delicate position, and, quite naturally, want to save myself, if
+possible, for even an arrest when there is little or no proof, ain't to
+be contemplated calmly."
+
+"You ought to know better than I how we should go to work. Dan an' I
+thought there would be plenty of time, for if those fellows were going
+to skip very soon they wouldn't have taken the trouble to carry the
+stuff down there, where it could not be gotten away quickly."
+
+"I'll think the matter over, Teddy, and come back here in a couple of
+hours," Hazelton said, after a moment's thought.
+
+"Don't tell anyone what you found out until after seeing me again."
+
+This conversation had been carried on at the rear of the cane-board,
+where the customers could not overhear it, and when the jewelry fakir
+walked toward the exhibition building it was necessary to satisfy Tim's
+curiosity regarding what had been accomplished.
+
+"I don't s'pose it's any of my business," the latter said, when Teddy
+concluded the story; "but I wouldn't be afraid to bet all I shall earn
+this week that you'll have trouble with that feller before the scrape is
+over. He knows so awful much that somethin' tough is bound to happen."
+
+Teddy did not think there was any good cause for alarm, more especially
+since he felt confident Dan would keep an eye on the oarsman, and during
+the next two hours he thought of nothing save earning money, for
+customers were plenty, and even with the assistance of the boy Tim had
+engaged it was all he and his clerk could do to wait upon those who were
+anxious to win a cane or knife.
+
+Now and then some of the other fakirs would visit him; but, as a rule,
+all were so busy that there was little time for the exchange of
+compliments, and even the cry of "Three rings for five cents, with the
+chance to get a dollar cane or knife for nothing!" was not needed to
+stimulate trade.
+
+It was two hours from the time of his return when Dan came up looking
+decidedly uneasy, and Teddy did not stop to make change for the man who
+had just patronized him, before he asked, hurriedly:
+
+"Now, what's up?"
+
+"Sam is missing."
+
+"What do you mean? How can that be?"
+
+"He was to row around the creek near the landing; but for the last hour
+no one has seen him, and, what is more, the boat can't be found. Long
+Jim an' his friend haven't come ashore, as near as I can make out, an'
+it looks to me as if that foolish Sam has got into trouble through
+trying to play detective."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+_SAM'S ADVENTURES._
+
+
+In order to explain Sam's absence, and one or two other incidents in
+their regular sequence, it is necessary to go back to the moment when,
+his friends having landed, the amateur detective was left to his own
+devices.
+
+His first impulse was to report his arrival to the manager of the boat
+exhibit, and then go about his routine duties, but before this very
+proper plan could be carried into effect he chanced to see Hazelton on
+the shore.
+
+"Now, what's he layin' around there for?" Sam asked of himself. "I'll
+bet Dan or Teddy has given the whole snap away, an' he's come to pull in
+the burglars. It's a mighty mean trick for them to play after I've
+worked the case so far that there's nothing to do but nab 'em. He'll get
+all the praise, an' folks won't know the job was managed by me."
+
+The longer Sam thought of this apparent ingratitude and treachery on the
+part of Teddy and Dan the more angry he grew, and it did not require
+many moments' thought for him to succeed in convincing himself that he
+had been very shabbily treated.
+
+Continuing to talk to himself, or rather at the tiller, on which his
+eyes were fixed, he added:
+
+"Folks have said so much about their savin' them women from drownin',
+when I mighter done the same thing if I'd been willin' to make a fool of
+myself, that they want to scoop in everything; but I could stop this
+little game by jest goin' ahead on my own hook. If I sneaked down the
+creek an' brought back the stuff them men have been hidin' people would
+begin to know how much I understand about detective work."
+
+This appeared in his mind as the most brilliant scheme he had ever
+conceived, and in a very few seconds Sam decided that it should be
+carried into effect.
+
+First, and with no very well-defined idea of why such a course was
+necessary, he rowed cautiously to and fro past the landing stage,
+scrutinizing closely every face he saw, and mentally hugging himself
+because of the excitement which would be caused by his return with the
+stolen property.
+
+Then he turned the boat, and began to row down the creek, stopping every
+few seconds to gaze around in such a mysterious manner that the
+suspicions of any one who observed him would have been instantly
+aroused.
+
+In this manner, which he believed the only true way for a first-class
+detective to approach his prey, Sam had rowed less than half a mile when
+he saw Long Jim and his companion returning.
+
+Now the time had come when true cunning was necessary, and the amateur
+detective began to display it by pulling the boat sharply around,
+heading her for an indentation on the opposite shore.
+
+Here he ran her bow aground, and lying at full length in the bottom,
+peered out at the men in the most stealthy manner.
+
+They had already taken notice of his erratic movements, and now regarded
+him intently, but, without checking the headway of their own craft, in a
+few minutes were beyond sight around the bend.
+
+"There," Sam said, with a long-drawn breath of relief, as he arose to a
+sitting posture, "if Teddy an' Dan had been here them fellers would have
+tumbled to the whole racket, but I've put 'em off the scent, an' will
+have plenty of time to do my work."
+
+He pulled out from the shore once more, gazed long and earnestly up and
+down the creek, and then, in the same ridiculous manner as before,
+continued the journey.
+
+The trip which should have consumed no more than an hour even with the
+most indolent oarsman, was not completed until twice that time had
+elapsed, and then fully fifteen minutes were spent by this very cautious
+boy in landing.
+
+He pulled his boat up high out of the water, and, in order to conceal
+her, heaped such a pile of dry grass on top of her that it must have
+attracted the attention of any one passing, more especially those who
+were familiar with the creek.
+
+This done he went toward the barn after the fashion of an old-time stage
+villain, halting at the slightest sound, and peering in every direction,
+fancying himself surrounded by foes.
+
+Not until he had circled completely around the barn twice did he venture
+to enter, and then, much to his disappointment, there was nothing to be
+seen. The building appeared to be absolutely empty, and even his eagle
+eye failed to discover any traces of recent occupancy.
+
+"Well, this is mighty funny," he said, with a sigh of disappointment.
+"Them fellers surely brought a lot of stuff in here, but they must have
+carried it out again."
+
+Having expended so much labor and time in reaching this place, he did
+not intend to return until after making a thorough search, however, and
+to this end he investigated one possible hiding-place after another,
+pulling up the boards of the rude flooring, and peering into places
+where nothing larger than a mouse could have been hidden.
+
+During this time the burglars were returning with all possible speed.
+Sam's actions, both as he came down the creek, and also while screening
+himself from view, were so suspicious that, guilty as the men were, they
+immediately concluded what was very near the truth.
+
+Long Jim recognized the boy as having been with Teddy when the bargain
+for the imaginary cane-board was made, and instead of returning to the
+fair grounds the two watched, from a point of vantage on the bank, until
+Master Sam had landed.
+
+His purpose was now evident, and it was necessary the burglars should
+resort to desperate measures to prevent the loss of their ill-gotten
+gains as well as to save themselves from imprisonment.
+
+When they arrived where it was possible to look into the barn, Sam was
+on his knees scraping away the dirt which appeared to have been recently
+disturbed, and they heard him say in a tone of exultation:
+
+"I've got to it at last, an' now we'll see what Teddy an' Dan have to
+say when I flash the whole lot of stuff up with nobody to help me. I
+reckon----"
+
+He did not finish the sentence, for at that moment Long Jim stepped
+directly in front of him, as he asked:
+
+"Did you leave anything here, my son?"
+
+"No--I--I--that is--you see----"
+
+Sam was so frightened that he could not say another word. It seemed as
+if his tongue was swollen to twice its natural size, while his throat
+was parched and dry, and to make bad matters worse, he had entirely
+neglected to invent a plausible excuse for his presence there in case of
+an interruption.
+
+"I asked if you'd left anything here?" Long Jim repeated, very mildly.
+
+"Well--well---- You see I jest come down to--to---- I thought, perhaps,
+I might find something, but it's time I was gettin' back to the fair,
+'cause the folks will be needin' me."
+
+As he spoke he attempted to back toward the door, but before taking half
+a dozen steps a cry of fear burst from his lips, for a heavy hand was
+laid with no gentle force on his shirt collar, and he staggered forward
+helplessly.
+
+"That's an invitation for you to hold on a bit, an' have a little
+conversation with two gentlemen who are mighty curious to know why you
+came here," Long Jim said, grimly. "You're goin' to tell us the whole
+partic'lars, or there won't be enough left of you to be seen under a
+microscope."
+
+Sam made no reply. He was literally dazed with fear, and just at that
+moment he thought the life of a detective very disagreeable.
+
+"Come, speak up, an' be quick about it," the man cried, fiercely. "We've
+got no time to waste on sich cubs as you, an' in about two minutes
+you'll get worse'n we served out the other night."
+
+"That wasn't me follerin' you from the museum tent," Sam said, quickly,
+thinking possibly this fact might work in his favor.
+
+"Who was it?"
+
+"Teddy an' Dan."
+
+"Who is Dan?"
+
+"A feller who works for the Stevens Arms Company up at the fair."
+
+"Why did they follow us?"
+
+"Teddy wanted to get back the money he gave you to buy a cane-board
+with."
+
+"If he knows what's wise for him he'll stop any such rackets, or he may
+get more'n he bargains for."
+
+Then the second man, who still held firmly to Sam's collar, asked, as he
+shook his prisoner vigorously:
+
+"How did you know we had been here?"
+
+"Us fellers saw you come down in a boat."
+
+"So all three are in the secret, eh?"
+
+Sam's only thought was that he might possibly save his own skin, and he
+replied in the affirmative, although he must have known that by such
+answer he was destroying his friends' chances of recovering the goods.
+
+"Where are the fools now?" Long Jim asked, angrily.
+
+"Up at the fair."
+
+"What do they intend to do?"
+
+"Get somebody to arrest you."
+
+"Then we've got to skip mighty lively, Phil," and Long Jim looked up at
+his companion.
+
+"Yes; but if my advice had been follered we wouldn't be in this scrape.
+You was the only one the cubs knew, an' by keepin' out of sight we
+mighter finished the work that's been laid out. You're so pig-headed
+that a yoke of oxen couldn't keep you in hidin'."
+
+"There's no use fightin' about it now; for we've got to get a move on us
+in short order. It won't do to let this boy have a chance to give the
+alarm."
+
+"Of course not. Lash him up somewhere so he can't make a noise, an' his
+chums will come before he starves to death."
+
+"Don't do that!" Sam cried, in an agony of terror. "I won't say a word
+about your catchin' me here, an' I'll do anything you say."
+
+"Oh, you're a nice plum to make promises, ain't you. It didn't take much
+persuadin' to make you go back on your friends, an' that's enough to
+show whether you can be trusted. Get the rope out of the boat, Phil, an'
+then we'll make ready for a long jump."
+
+Phil obeyed, grumbling as he went because his partner had refused to
+take his advice, thus plunging both of them into danger, and Long Jim
+turned his attention to the prisoner once more.
+
+"Before we leave this part of the country for good I'm goin' to give you
+somethin' to remember us by so's you won't go 'round stickin' your nose
+into other people's business agin."
+
+"What are you goin' to do?" Sam asked, his face growing even paler than
+before.
+
+"Give you the worst floggin' a boy ever had. I'd do it now if there
+wasn't so much work to be got through."
+
+Sam had sufficient sense to know that all his pleadings for mercy would
+be in vain, and he held his peace until Phil returned with a long coil
+of rope which had been used as a boat's painter.
+
+One of the beams at the end of the barn served as a post to which to
+lash the prisoner, and here the amateur detective was made fast in such
+a skillful manner that he could not so much as move his arms.
+
+"Shall we gag him now?" Phil asked, and Long Jim replied:
+
+"No, there's time enough.
+
+"He can't make any one hear if he yells his best, an' I've got a little
+business to settle before he's trussed up for good."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+_MISSING._
+
+
+When Dan informed Teddy that Sam was missing, and suggested the
+possibility of the burglars having gotten him in their power, both the
+boys were decidedly alarmed; but the matter ceased to appear as serious
+after it had been discussed in all its bearings.
+
+"Long Jim wouldn't have dared to spirit him away when there are so many
+people around," Teddy said, after a long silence, during which he was
+trying to imagine what Sam might have done. "Besides, what would be the
+good of taking him if we were left behind?"
+
+"Perhaps they count on hauling us in, too."
+
+"That isn't to be thought of for a moment. They don't want to burden
+themselves with a lot of boys when every effort must be made to get the
+stolen property out of this section of the country before they are
+discovered."
+
+"I'll allow all that sounds reasonable, but where is Sam?"
+
+"Of course I don't know. Do you think he would dare to go down the
+river again after we landed?"
+
+"No, indeed; he's too much of a coward for that. If there's been any
+funny business it was done when the men got back."
+
+"Then we have no need to worry, for there are hundreds of people on the
+bank of the creek all the time, an' Sam would know enough to yell if
+anybody tried to steal him."
+
+The idea that the amateur detective might be stolen seemed so comical to
+Dan that he gave way to mirth, and what had promised to be a most
+sorrowful visit speedily became a merry one.
+
+"He had permission to remain away from the exhibition building during
+the rest of the day," Teddy finally said, "an' most likely he's goin' to
+take advantage of it by roaming around the grounds, exercising his
+detective faculties. He'll turn up at the museum to-night all right,
+with a big yarn to tell about his supposed adventures."
+
+"I reckon you're right; but I did get a little rattled when his boss
+asked me where he was. I'll come back this way when it's time to go to
+supper."
+
+"Wait a minute. I'm mighty hungry now, an' business has been so good
+that I can afford to treat to sandwiches an' lemonade, if you'll go with
+me over to the grand stand. I'll bring you back something, Tim," he
+added, as he leaped over the railing.
+
+Dan said he could remain away half an hour from the rifle exhibit, and
+Teddy was now so easy in mind concerning money matters that he resolved
+to have thirty minutes of sport.
+
+The boys first made a tour of that portion of the grounds where the
+fakirs were congregated, stopping a moment to see the whip dealer
+lashing a pine stake to show the quality of his goods, and then watching
+the "Great African Dodger," who thrust his woolly head through an
+aperture in a canvas screen for all those to throw balls at who were
+inclined to pay the price.
+
+Then they stopped at the "envelope game," where were spread on a stand a
+large collection of cheap, gaudy goods, each bearing a printed number,
+every one supposed to correspond with those contained in a box of
+envelopes, and this fakir was doing a big business, as was shown by the
+fact that he could afford to hire a barker, who cried continually at the
+full strength of his lungs:
+
+"Come up now, and try your luck! Here's where we have all prizes and no
+blanks! Ten cents buys an envelope, with the privilege of drawing for
+yourself, so there can be no job put up against you, and every number
+calls for some one of the many valuable articles in the layout. Here's a
+gentleman who spends only ten cents and gets a pair of those beautiful,
+triple-plated, double-expansion, fine pure metal cuff buttons, worth two
+dollars at some stores!"
+
+"Come on!" Dan said, impatiently. "That fellow is almost as big a snide
+as Hazelton."
+
+"How do you make that out? I can see a lot of things that cost more than
+a dollar. Look at the silver watch, and the revolver."
+
+"That may be all very well; but no one except a fellow who is interested
+in the business gets any of those articles."
+
+"You can select any envelope you choose."
+
+"That's right; but the ones with the numbers calling for the big prizes
+are lying flat in the box where nobody can get them. If you should
+accuse the man of cheating he would turn the whole thing upside down,
+and then, of course, they could be found. Here comes a fellow who I know
+is cappin' for that fakir. Watch how he does it."
+
+The apparent stranger approached the stand, and after some talk as to
+how the game was run, invested ten cents.
+
+The man did not open the envelope he drew; but handed it to the fakir,
+who, pretending to look at the card it contained, shouted:
+
+"Number fifty-four. The gentleman has drawn that beautiful solid silver
+watch worth fifty dollars, and I will give him thirty for his bargain."
+
+The stranger showed his prize to the crowd that clustered around him,
+and business was increased wonderfully, for it had apparently been
+proven that the game was conducted fairly.
+
+"Now watch him," Dan said, as the stranger walked away with his prize
+ostentatiously displayed, and the two boys followed a short distance
+off, until they saw him halt behind a booth, where he turned the article
+won over to a barker who had approached.
+
+"That's the way it is done," Dan said, "and when we come back you'll see
+the same watch on the layout."
+
+Teddy was rapidly being initiated in the tricks of the fakirs, and the
+more he saw the more firmly was he resolved not to follow the business
+longer than the present week, although he believed his own game to be an
+honest one.
+
+The cheap jewelry dealer; the man who had been selling the remnants of a
+stock of knives made by a manufacturer who "had bankrupted himself by
+putting into them too expensive material;" the fakir with the dolls
+which were to be knocked down by balls thrown from a certain distance,
+with a prize of one cigar if the customer could tumble two over, and the
+peanut-candy dealer were visited in turn, and then the boys were
+attracted by the sound of Hazelton's voice.
+
+He was plying his peculiar trade again, and by the appearance of the
+crowd was meeting with great success.
+
+"Let's see how he gets out of it this time," Teddy suggested, and Dan
+agreed.
+
+The fakir had arrived at that point where he was giving away the
+supposed watches, and the boys listened until they saw his preparations
+for departure.
+
+"What beats me is how he gets clear every time," Dan whispered. "I
+should think after he had swindled four or five hundred, some of them
+would lay for a chance to get even with him."
+
+"He says they do, an' that's why he left his satchel with me."
+
+Hazelton recognized the boys just as he was telling that Nathan
+Hargreaves might possibly act as his agent after the close of the fair,
+and nodded pleasantly, as he gathered up the reins; but this was one of
+the occasions when he was not to be allowed to go scot free.
+
+Two stalwart-looking fellows were standing near the head of the horse,
+and when the fakir would have driven off they seized the bridle, one of
+them shouting:
+
+"Come down with that money! This is the second time I've seen you do us
+countrymen up to-day, and now you've got to square things."
+
+Hazelton swung his whip around, striking the speaker full in the face,
+and causing the horse to plunge and rear, but yet the fellows kept their
+hold.
+
+The whip was pulled from the fakir's hand, and in an instant it appeared
+as if a riot had begun. Those who had been content to keep secret the
+fact of having been swindled now grew bold as they saw there was a
+leader in the movement, and more than a hundred leaped forward to seize
+the representative of the alleged jewelry manufacturers.
+
+"He'll be killed!" Teddy shouted, and would have attempted to go to the
+assistance of the man who had been kind to him, despite the fact that he
+could not have aided him in any way against so many; but for the fact
+that Dan pulled him back, as he shouted:
+
+"Can't you see that it would be fifty to one if you should go in that
+crowd? We couldn't help him, and what's the use of gettin' a big lickin'
+for nothing? Besides, what would become of your business if the people
+here thought you were his partner?"
+
+Before Dan ceased speaking Teddy realized how useless would be any
+effort of his, and he remained passive, trying to get a glimpse of the
+ill-fated fakir.
+
+The numbers who beset him completely hid Hazelton from view. The
+carriage had been overturned by the first desperate rush of the victims,
+and the horse was clearing a space around himself by the free use of his
+heels.
+
+"They'll commit murder!" Teddy cried.
+
+"I don't believe it'll be quite as bad as that; but he won't be likely
+to give away any more lockets while this fair lasts."
+
+As a matter of fact, Hazelton was not left to fight the battle alone.
+Like every other fakir engaged in that peculiar business, he had several
+partners whose duty it was to mingle with the crowd for the purpose of
+intimidating any who might be disposed to make trouble, and these had
+closed in upon him, while some of the more timid spectators shouted for
+the constables.
+
+[Illustration: "Run as you never did before, Teddy, for if they get hold
+of us it'll be a bad job all around!"]
+
+Once Teddy caught a glimpse of the unfortunate man; his glossy hat was
+gone, his clothing torn, and his face covered with blood.
+
+"I can see him now!" he cried, "and it looks as if they had about used
+him up, for----"
+
+Before he could finish the sentence a stranger rushed toward him, and
+showing the familiar black satchel in his hand, said hurriedly:
+
+"Get out of here with that. Hazelton will see you some time this
+evening. Don't stop a minute!"
+
+Before the boy could reply the stranger was forcing his way through the
+struggling, yelling crowd, in order to aid his partner, and Teddy said
+in dismay:
+
+"Now we are in a muss. Here is all his money, an' if anybody sees us
+with it we'll have a tough time."
+
+"You can't throw it away, an' we must sneak off," Dan said, and the
+expression on his face told how distressed he was that such a
+responsibility had been thrust upon them.
+
+"Shall we go back to the stand?"
+
+"No, that would never do, for then they would be sure to vent their
+anger on you. Go up to the museum; Mr. Sweet knows Hazelton, an' may be
+willin' to help him by keeping the satchel till the row is over."
+
+These words had been spoken as the boys were trying to make their way
+through the fringe of spectators which had hemmed them in since the
+fight began, and after some difficulty they succeeded; but at the same
+moment one of the combatants, who had received more than his share of
+punishment, emerged close by their side.
+
+He saw Hazelton's satchel, and recognized it.
+
+"Come here, fellows! two little villains are making off with the money!
+That's what we want!"
+
+He at once started in pursuit, as did several others, and Dan cried, as
+he helped carry the burden:
+
+"Run as you never did before, Teddy, for if they get hold of us it'll be
+a bad job all around!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+_A TERRIBLE NIGHT._
+
+
+At just about the same moment when Teddy and Dan were running with
+Hazelton's money at full speed toward the museum tent, with the chance
+of escape very much against them, Sam was in a decidedly painful frame
+of mind.
+
+After he had been securely tied the two men conversed in low tones for
+several minutes, and then, as if having arrived at some definite
+conclusion, began to make preparations for leaving the place.
+
+At the same spot where Sam had been interrupted while scraping away the
+dirt they proceeded to dig with a shovel which Phil procured from
+somewhere outside the building, and during this labor the prisoner could
+hear fragments of the conversation.
+
+Once Long Jim ceased his work long enough to say:
+
+"When you come to look at the matter quietly it doesn't seem as if we'd
+got into sich a very bad scrape. You can manage to bring the rest of
+the stuff down the creek between now an' Friday mornin' and I've got a
+plan for givin' anybody who may come after us a good clue to the boy's
+disappearance."
+
+Phil made some remark which Sam could not hear, and his companion
+replied in a louder tone:
+
+"It can all be done so's to make folks think we've gone up the creek,
+an' we've got to lay low for a while, which won't be a hard job while
+the weather is warm."
+
+"But I don't like the idea of totin' that cub with us so long."
+
+"I'll take care of him, an' will make him earn his board, or somethin's
+bound to break."
+
+From this time until several packages were unearthed Sam could hear
+nothing; but what had already been said was sufficient to convince him
+that he was to have a very unpleasant experience, and for at least the
+hundredth time he fervently wished he had never so much as heard of
+detective work.
+
+After the goods had been brought to light the earth was replaced in the
+excavation and pounded down carefully. Then fully half an hour was spent
+digging in different places, probably for the purpose of misleading any
+one who might come there in search of plunder, for Phil said in a tone
+of satisfaction as he ceased the apparently aimless labor:
+
+"It'll take at least a day before all of these suspicious looking spots
+have been investigated, an' in the meanwhile, unless we're chumps, we
+shall know what's goin' on. I'll take one load to the boat; make sure
+the coast is clear, an' then the three of us can carry the balance. Have
+the boy ready for a quick move, an' see to it that he can't give an
+alarm."
+
+"I'll knock his head off if he so much as thinks of such a thing," and
+as Phil disappeared with a portion of the plunder Long Jim began to
+unfasten Sam's bonds, saying as he did so:
+
+"We've made up our minds to hold you with us a few days 'cause you're
+sich jolly company. If you obey orders an' keep your mouth shut there's
+a chance of gettin' outer this scrape mighty easy; but I'd slit your
+throat in a jiffy if you tried to give us the slip or made any noise."
+
+Sam made no reply; but his captor could see very plainly that the boy
+was nearly paralyzed with fright, and it was safe to infer he would
+follow the instructions given to the letter.
+
+Phil returned in a very short time and reported:
+
+"The coast is clear. There's not a craft to be seen on the creek, an' we
+can leave without danger."
+
+The rope had been removed from Sam's limbs, and Long Jim proceeded to
+load him down with bundles until he staggered under the weight.
+
+"Now, see that you walk a chalk line," the burglar said, fiercely.
+"Foller Phil, an' I'll keep behind to make sure there are no tricks
+played. Remember what I promised!"
+
+The men could carry the remainder of the goods in one load, and the
+three went out of the barn hurriedly, Sam not daring to so much as lift
+his eyes from the ground lest Long Jim's threat should be carried into
+execution.
+
+Arriving at the water's edge the boat was loaded, the prisoner ordered
+to take his place at the oars, and then the final preparations were
+made.
+
+Phil uncovered the boat in which Sam had come, launched and overturned
+her. Then taking the hat from the unresisting boy's head, threw it far
+out in the channel, afterward giving the little craft a shove which sent
+her a long distance from the shore. Next the two oars were sent after
+the hat, and Phil said with a laugh:
+
+"The current ain't very strong; but with the aid of the wind I reckon
+that stuff will drift up to the fair grounds before dark."
+
+Sam's despair was already so great that it did not seem as if it could
+be increased; but the last vestige of hope fled when he realized that
+these things had been done in order to make it appear as if he were
+dead.
+
+"Teddy and Dan won't think of huntin' for me after the boat is found,"
+he thought, "an' these men are sure to kill me before this scrape is
+over!"
+
+The two burglars seated themselves comfortably in the stern-sheets, the
+packages being placed at the bow to trim the craft properly, and Long
+Jim said, sternly:
+
+"You've been showin' off your skill as an oarsman for two or three days,
+an' we want you to do it now. Put in your best licks, for it'll be tough
+if we don't get through the water mighty fast."
+
+Even Sam's worst enemy would have pitied him at this moment. No galley
+slave chained to his seat could have been more utterly helpless, and he
+exerted himself to the utmost in order to please those who professed to
+be so willing to punish or kill.
+
+Every stroke of the oars took them farther away from the fair grounds,
+and each puff of wind carried the evidences of the prisoner's death
+nearer the only ones who might take the trouble to search for him.
+
+Not until fully an hour had passed did the burglars give any sign of a
+desire to end the journey, and then Long Jim said:
+
+"We must be six miles from the fair grounds by this time, an' that is as
+far as you'll want to pull to-night, Phil. There should be plenty of
+good hidin'-places in this bit of woods, an' I think we'd better haul
+up."
+
+"All right. Steer her into that ditch over there, an' we'll look
+around."
+
+Thus far in his experience as a detective this was the only thing Sam
+had had for which to be thankful. His arms were so tired that it seemed
+as if he could not have pulled another stroke, and his clothes were
+literally wet from the perspiration that came from his body.
+
+Phil went ashore, leaving his companion to watch the almost exhausted
+prisoner, and in a few moments the former shouted:
+
+"Load that cub up, an' bring him over here. This is a capital place to
+locate in for a couple of days."
+
+Staggering under the heavy burden Long Jim placed on his shoulders the
+amateur detective was forced on through the underbrush in advance of his
+captor until the two arrived at a perfect tangle of cedars.
+
+Phil returned to the boat for the remainder of the goods, and all the
+plunder was placed inside the thicket where the foliage was so dense
+that one might have passed within a few feet of the spot and not had any
+suspicion men were hidden there.
+
+A tiny brook ran past one side of the hiding-place, and Sam took
+advantage of the opportunity to check his raging thirst while the men
+were laying plans for the future.
+
+"I'll go back soon after sunset," Phil said, as he lighted his pipe and
+proceeded to make himself comfortable. "We can leave the boy here to
+look out for the stuff, an' you'd better come with me up to the barn
+so's to learn if any one visits the place. I shall be back before
+morning, an' you can let me know if the coast is clear."
+
+"Shall you try to finish the job we were talkin' about?"
+
+"No; things are so hot jest now that it won't pay to take any more risks
+than are absolutely necessary. What we want is to get out of this
+portion of the country as soon as possible."
+
+"All right. I'll leave you to manage the rest of the business, an'
+promise to follow orders."
+
+"I think it's about time you said that, Jim. If my plans had been
+carried out in the first place we wouldn't be in sich a muss; but could
+be havin' the cream of the pickin's at the fair."
+
+"Well, what's the use of harpin' on that all the time? The thing has
+been done, an' we've got to make the best of it. Do you think it'll be
+safe to leave this cub here alone while we're away?"
+
+"It will be when I get through with him," was the grim reply, and Sam,
+terrified by the vagueness of this remark, more even than he had been by
+the plain language previously used, cried, piteously:
+
+"Please don't leave me here alone to-night! I'll pull the boat, an' do
+everything you say, without so much as yippin'."
+
+"Them as starts out in the detective business have to take what comes,
+'specially when their own foolishness brings it about. You joined our
+party of your own accord, my son, an' must put up with what we choose to
+give."
+
+Sam said nothing more. He was reaping what he had sowed, and decided
+that matters could not be much worse even if he was caught trying to
+escape, therefore he resolved to take desperate chances in an effort to
+give his captors the slip.
+
+There was no opportunity to make the attempt, on this night at least,
+for when Phil had finished smoking he proceeded in a very methodical
+manner to secure the prisoner.
+
+Sam was ordered to seat himself on the ground, with his back to the
+trunk of a cedar-tree, and he was fastened skillfully, with his elbows
+tied back in such a manner that he could not bring his hands together.
+Both feet were bound, and then, with a sudden movement, Phil forced the
+boy's mouth open, shoving into it a short piece of pine wood about an
+inch and a half in diameter.
+
+This was secured in such a manner that the prisoner could not free
+himself from the uncomfortable bridle, neither would it be possible for
+him to make the slightest outcry.
+
+"Now, don't shout for help while we are gone, an' unless the bears eat
+you up we shall meet again about daybreak," Phil said, with a coarse
+laugh as he and Jim went out of the thicket toward the creek.
+
+Poor Sam had never thought of the possibility that there might be bears
+in this section of the country until the burglar suggested it, and he
+was so terrified as not to realize it was impossible there could be any
+dangerous animals in such a thickly-settled portion of the State.
+
+Therefore, in addition to the danger to be apprehended from his captors,
+he had constantly before his mind this new cause for fear. The rustling
+of the leaves, the flight of a bird as it sought a perch for the night,
+or the soughing of the wind among the branches were to him so many
+proofs that a violent death would be his before morning.
+
+If the beginning of the hours of darkness was so terrible it can well be
+fancied how he suffered before another day dawned.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+_A NARROW ESCAPE._
+
+
+Neither Teddy nor Dan had any hope of reaching the museum tent before
+their pursuers could overtake them, and although both knew what might be
+the result if they were taken with the jewelry fakir's money and goods
+in their possession, they did not for a moment think of abandoning the
+property.
+
+The cries of those in the rear attracted the attention of the spectators
+elsewhere on the grounds, and without waiting to learn the cause of the
+trouble hundreds of men and boys joined in the chase, all shouting at
+the full strength of their lungs:
+
+"Stop thief! Stop thief!"
+
+The distance to be traversed was nearly a quarter of a mile; but the
+many turns the boys were forced to make in order to avoid those who were
+ready to capture them doubled this, and they were yet very far from the
+goal when a burly, red-faced man jumped in front of them.
+
+It seemed as if capture was inevitable; but Teddy resorted to the last
+means of defense, and was successful.
+
+Letting go his hold of the satchel he lowered his head, leaped forward
+with full force, striking the officious stranger full in the stomach.
+
+The man, not anticipating such an attack at a moment when he almost had
+his hands upon the supposed thieves, was bowled over like a nine-pin,
+and, jumping quickly aside, Teddy caught hold of the satchel once more.
+
+By this time both the boys were so nearly winded that speech was well
+nigh impossible; but Dan managed to gasp admiringly:
+
+"You're a dandy, old fellow," and then, with one supreme effort,
+increased his pace a trifle.
+
+It was fortunate that there were no spectators in front of Mr. Sweet's
+tent when the boys came in sight of it. The barker was lounging in a
+chair outside, and on catching a glimpse of the boys recognized them
+immediately.
+
+The crowd in pursuit would have told a duller man than he professed to
+be that there had been some serious trouble, and, running to meet the
+boys as if to intercept them, he cried:
+
+"Circle around the canvas, an' crawl underneath, so's that gang won't
+see where you've gone!"
+
+The fugitives understood the scheme at once, and making a short detour
+as if to avoid him, dashed under the guy-ropes at one end, gaining the
+interior of the tent before the pursuers arrived.
+
+Mr. Sweet had just started toward the flap to ascertain the cause of the
+commotion when the boys entered, and, thinking himself about to be
+attacked, leaped quickly back as he seized an ironbound stake.
+
+"Oh, it's you, eh?" he said, on recognizing the intruders. "What's up?
+Are you the thieves they're yellin' for?"
+
+Teddy was hardly able to speak; but he held up the satchel, as he
+panted:
+
+"Hazelton's--they're killin' him--he--wants--this--saved."
+
+"Yes, I understand it now. Jump into the wagon an' get under the stuff
+there. I'll take the valise. Them kind of fakirs are bound to come to
+grief sooner or later, an' honest people get into a muss tryin' to help
+'em. I'd like to see the fair where them kinds of games wasn't allowed;
+but don't s'pose I ever shall, although it's always promised."
+
+While Mr. Sweet had been grumbling, and at the same time concealing the
+satchel under the box containing the snakes, the boys were doing their
+best to hide themselves beneath the litter of ropes and canvas which had
+been carelessly thrown into the wagon.
+
+In the meantime the pursuers came up, discovered the unpleasant fact
+that the fugitives were no longer in sight, and began to parley with the
+barker.
+
+"I tried to catch 'em," the boys heard the latter say; "but they got
+around the tent before I had time to find out what the matter was."
+
+"They've gone inside!" one of the crowd shouted. "Don't let's allow
+swindlers to get the best of us so easy!"
+
+"That's the way to talk!" another cried. "We'll have 'em out if the show
+has to come down!"
+
+At this moment Mr. Sweet, looking calm and undisturbed, emerged from the
+flap.
+
+"Bring out them boys, or down comes your tent!" a man yelled.
+
+"I reckon the wisest plan for you to pursue is to wait till I find out
+what all this means," the proprietor of the museum said loudly, at the
+same time beckoning the barker and the clown to his side. "It looks to
+me as if this was the same gang who came here last night tryin' to clean
+us out, an' warrants for their arrest are in the hands of the constables
+now. I paid one hundred dollars for the privilege of exhibitin' here,
+an' that means I'm to have all the protection the managers of this fair
+and the authorities of the town can give me. I've warned you off; but if
+you still want to finish up the work of last night, an' the constables
+don't come in time, there are three of us here who are good for twice
+that number of your gang, an' when a man gets a tap over the head with
+one of these he's not in it any longer!"
+
+Mr. Sweet flourished the heavy stake as he spoke, and his employes
+showed that they were armed in the same manner.
+
+"We didn't come to disturb you," one of the crowd said, in a milder
+tone, as the greater number fell back before the threats made of
+invoking the aid of the law. "All we want is a valise two boys brought
+here, for in it is quite a pile of our money."
+
+"How did they get it from you?" the proprietor of the museum asked for
+the purpose of gaining time in the hope the constables would put in an
+appearance.
+
+"We were swindled by a jewelry agent, an' are goin' to get back our
+own."
+
+"Oh, you are, eh? Well, I haven't got the stuff; but if you allow
+yourselves to be swindled, will you help matters by turning thieves? You
+can sue the man who has done you up; but there's a penalty for stealing,
+as you will find out if you keep on in this way."
+
+The less impetuous among the pursuers understood that the showman was
+speaking only the truth, and, now that they had an opportunity for
+reflection, began to be ashamed of the part they were playing. One by
+one walked away without making any further remonstrance, and in a short
+time only a dozen or so remained in front of the tent.
+
+All these were young men, and several had been drinking, therefore the
+danger was not yet past.
+
+"You stand here and brain the first man who attempts to enter," Mr.
+Sweet said, as he disappeared inside the tent. Then hurrying to where
+Teddy and Dan were hidden, he whispered:
+
+"It may be possible that in order to avoid a row I shall be obliged to
+let this gang in. There is no one behind the canvas, and you can slip
+out readily. Go directly back where you belong, an' if anybody accuses
+you of being the boys who brought away the valise deny it. I'm goin' to
+make a big bluff about lookin' for constables, an' the minute you hear
+me talking, move lively."
+
+"What about Hazelton's money?" Teddy asked.
+
+"He'll find it here when he dares to come for it."
+
+An instant later the fugitives heard him say from the outside:
+
+"I propose to call for help in case you very respectable young gentleman
+should take a notion to break in and steal."
+
+"All we ask is that you'll turn out them boys," one of the party
+replied, angrily, "for, whether it's stealing or not, we're bound to
+have that fakir's money."
+
+"That part of it is nothing to me. There are no boys inside, an' if you
+want to go in one at a time, so there'll be no chance of gettin' the
+best of me an' destroyin' my property, I don't think there'll be any
+objection made."
+
+"Now's our time before they come?" Dan whispered, as he slipped softly
+down from the wagon, and Teddy followed.
+
+It was but the work of a moment to raise the canvas and step out. There
+was absolutely no one in sight. The tent had been erected near the edge
+of the grounds, and there was nothing in the vicinity to attract the
+sightseers.
+
+"We'll get over the fence, an' come in through the main gate. It's
+better to pay for admission than to let people suspect we were the ones
+who have been chased."
+
+"Go on; I'll stay close at your heels."
+
+Five minutes later they were walking along the dusty road looking as
+innocent as possible, and feeling comparatively safe.
+
+"Do you suppose any one will know us?" Teddy asked after they had
+trudged some distance in silence.
+
+"There can't be much danger of that. All the crowd saw were our backs,
+and, besides, after those fellows cool off they'll be ashamed of
+themselves. I don't reckon you'll have any trouble; but I may get it hot
+from the boss because I've been away so long."
+
+"I guess there won't be much danger of that; but if anything should
+happen come to my stand. After what has happened I reckon I can afford
+to whack up with you on some of the profits, especially since every one
+says to-morrow is to be such a big day. Where do you suppose Hazelton
+is?"
+
+"He must have had a chance to get off when the men started for us; but
+I'll bet he don't look as nice as he did this morning."
+
+By this time the boys were at the ticket-office, and, paying the price
+of admission, they walked into the inclosure without attracting the
+slightest attention.
+
+On the way to his place of business Teddy chanced to think of the errand
+on which they had started out, and he bought a generous supply of
+sandwiches for Dan, Tim, and himself.
+
+When the two arrived at the cane-board business was at its height, and
+the clerk and his assistant were having quite as much as they could do
+to attend to the customers.
+
+This saved Teddy the necessity of entering into any explanation while
+strangers were near, and he immediately went to work, not having an idle
+moment until nearly nightfall, when the greater portion of the visitors
+had departed.
+
+"Where did you and Dan go that you staid away so long?" Tim asked as he
+and Teddy began to pack up the stock of canes and knives.
+
+"Oh, it's a long story; I'll tell you all about it while we are eating
+supper," Teddy replied, with a significant look in the direction of the
+assistant.
+
+Tim understood that there was some secret regarding the matter, and he
+at once proceeded to get rid of a possible eavesdropper by saying to the
+assistant:
+
+"Here's the money I promised. There's no need of your stayin' any
+longer."
+
+"Shall I come to work in the morning?"
+
+Tim looked toward his employer, and the latter said:
+
+"Yes, of course, if it is pleasant weather. Everybody says there'll be a
+bigger crowd than ever, an' I reckon we shall have work enough for all
+hands."
+
+The boy had but just taken his departure when Dan approached, looking
+very mournful.
+
+"Have you been bounced?" Teddy cried, excitedly.
+
+"Not a bit of it; but look here," and Dan held up a straw hat. "That's
+poor Sam's! His boat has been found bottom up, an' this, with one of the
+oars, was fished out of the creek a few moments ago. While we were
+talking rough about him the poor boy was drowning!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+_THE ARREST._
+
+
+Teddy was dazed by the tidings and apparent proof of Sam's death.
+Without being able to explain why, it seemed as if the amateur detective
+was not the sort of a boy who might be expected to depart this life
+suddenly, and the news saddened him wonderfully.
+
+"Just think," he said, "the poor fellow wouldn't try to save the women
+because of the danger of approaching a drowning person, and in such a
+short time he himself is at the bottom of the creek."
+
+"If he has got any folks some word ought to be sent to them."
+
+"I never heard him say whether he had or not. Will any one search for
+the body?"
+
+"The man who represents the Davis Company says he will have men out in
+the morning, if it is possible to hire any; if not, there will be plenty
+wanting a job by Saturday, and he can then get all he wants. It's bound
+to be a long search, for there's no telling where the boat capsized."
+
+Nothing save Sam's untimely fate was spoken of during the time they were
+packing up the goods and carrying them to the tent, and then Mr. Sweet,
+after having been told the sad news, said, without commenting upon it:
+
+"You boys had better go to supper now, an' get back before dark, for
+there's no knowin' but that some of those fellows who called on me may
+be waiting to take their revenge out on you."
+
+"How did you get rid of them?" Dan asked.
+
+"That part of it was as easy as rollin' off a log, after you boys were
+out of sight. I let 'em in one at a time, an' the chumps never tumbled
+to the fact that you had gone under the canvas. They came to the
+conclusion you must have climbed over the fence, an' we didn't take the
+trouble to show them the mistake. It was a close shave, though. At one
+time, when I was talkin' so loud about stealing, I thought we'd have the
+toughest kind of a row."
+
+"Is the money all right?"
+
+"It's jest where I left it, an' won't be touched till he comes to claim
+it, unless you boys want to take charge of the property."
+
+"Indeed we don't," Teddy replied, quickly. "I've had all I want of such
+caretaking."
+
+"Then go to supper, an' hurry back."
+
+The boys waited only long enough to stow their goods in the wagon, and
+then Mr. Sweet's advice was acted upon.
+
+As a matter of course Tim wanted to know what the proprietor of the
+museum had been talking about, and as they were walking across the
+grounds Teddy told the whole story, concluding by saying:
+
+"It was a little the worst scrape I ever got into; but after the money
+had been placed in our hands, and the man who left it went off, we
+couldn't do different from what we did."
+
+"That Hazelton had no business to get you into such a row," Tim replied,
+indignantly. "Why didn't he hang on to the stuff, an' take his lickin'
+like a man?"
+
+"I don't think he knew it was to be given to us. The fellow who did it
+had seen him leave the satchel with us once, most likely, an' when there
+was danger of being robbed, believed we could look out for it again.
+It's the last time such a thing will happen, for I'm going to tell
+Hazelton that I don't want to be mixed up in his business."
+
+At this point Dan changed the subject of conversation by speculating
+upon the way in which Sam met his death, and this topic was such a
+mournful one that nothing else was thought of until the party returned
+to the tent once more.
+
+Then came the question of how much money had been taken in during the
+day, and after figuring up the amount he had spent, Teddy reckoned the
+cash on hand, announcing the result as follows:
+
+"Countin' what I paid out, we've taken sixty-one dollars an' seventy
+cents since morning. It don't seem reasonable, but a feller has to
+believe it after seein' the money."
+
+"You'll have a much better trade to-morrow, if it is fair, and you're
+not recognized as one of the boys who helped to get Hazelton's money
+away," Mr. Sweet said, cheerily. "I predict that the receipts will
+figure up hard on to a hundred dollars."
+
+Teddy gasped like a person who is suddenly submerged in cold water at
+the thought of earning so much, and he realized that if such should be
+the case he would be able to assist his mother very materially.
+
+"I'll pay you, Tim, before I get so dazzled as to forget it," he said,
+with a laugh, and the clerk felt almost as rich as his employer when he
+received six dollars and seventeen cents for a day's labor which came
+very near being sport.
+
+"I only wish the fair held on for six months," he said gleefully. "It
+seems too bad that there are only two days more, for Saturday never
+counts."
+
+"You can go to the Holtown fair, and try it for yourself. I'll give you
+what stock we have left on hand."
+
+"Then I'll do it," Tim replied, emphatically, and straightway he began
+to speculate as to the enormous amount of money he would earn.
+
+Teddy tied his money in as compact a package as possible, intending to
+give it to his mother when she should arrive on the morrow, and Mr.
+Sweet had advised that all hands "turn in" early, when the flap was
+raised, admitting a man who appeared to be covered with adhesive plaster
+and bandages.
+
+Not until the newcomer had approached within the circle of light cast by
+the lantern did the occupants of the tent recognize him as the jewelry
+fakir, and Teddy cried in surprise:
+
+"Why, Mr. Hazelton! We didn't expect to see you to-night!"
+
+"Did you think I was dead?"
+
+"It looked as if you would be killed for a certainty, and you did get
+pretty well done up."
+
+"Yes; as the reports of the prize fights put it, 'I'm badly disfigured,
+but still in the ring.' Was the money taken away all right?"
+
+"Mr. Sweet has hidden it."
+
+"And how did you come out of the scrape?"
+
+"If it hadn't been for the folks here we should have fared about the
+same as you did."
+
+"I'm sorry, my boy, that you were dragged into the matter, and it
+wouldn't have happened if I'd understood what Kelly was going to do. He
+knew you could be trusted, and so turned it over; but it was a mean
+situation to put you in."
+
+"It wasn't pleasant for any of us," Mr. Sweet said; "but you can thank
+the boys for hanging on to the bag as if it had been their own. Most
+fellows of their age would have dropped it long before reaching here.
+How did you get off?"
+
+"When the cry was raised that the money had gone the greater portion of
+the crowd started in pursuit, an' my partners and I managed to hold our
+own until a couple of constables came up. They took charge of the team,
+and gave us a chance to slip through the gates."
+
+"What are you going to do now? Try it to-morrow?"
+
+"With this face? Well, I should say not. There is a fellow here who has
+bought my right to the privilege, and I shall leave Peach Bottom early
+in the morning."
+
+"That's about the best thing you can do, and I'd advise that you don't
+spend much time out of doors until then."
+
+"I'm not intending to. It was necessary to come here, and, unless you
+object, I'll stay a while so's they will have time to sober up a bit."
+
+"You're welcome to what we've got, even if I don't like your way of
+doing business."
+
+"I want to straighten matters with the boys, and if they----"
+
+Hazelton did not finish the sentence, for at that moment the canvas flap
+was pushed aside and a man entered with an unmistakable air of
+authority.
+
+"Hold on there, friend," Mr. Sweet shouted. "We don't allow visitors at
+this time of night."
+
+"I understand that, but reckon you won't make any very big kick when I
+tell you that I'm one of the deputy sheriffs of this county, and have
+come to serve a warrant."
+
+"On whom?"
+
+"Frank Hazelton, who claims to be an agent for a firm of jewelry
+manufacturers. I believe you're the man," he added, approaching the
+disfigured fakir.
+
+"You've got that part of it straight enough, but what am I to be
+arrested for?"
+
+"You are suspected of being concerned in the burglary which was
+committed in this town last night."
+
+Hazelton did not express nearly as much surprise as the boys, who were
+really dazed by the announcement.
+
+"So Hargreaves has finally succeeded," the fakir said half to himself,
+and the officer replied, quickly:
+
+"This has nothing to do with old Nathan's affair, although it does look
+as if the two burglaries were committed by the same person."
+
+Hazelton remained silent several seconds, during which time the sheriff
+waited patiently for him to say he was ready to go, and then he asked:
+
+"Can I speak to one of these boys in private. It has nothing to do with
+the charge, but I want him to aid me in getting a good lawyer."
+
+"I am sorry to say I must hear all that is talked about, however
+trifling it may be."
+
+"Well, I don't suppose it can make much difference," and without rising
+from his seat, Hazelton continued, "Teddy, you believe I had nothing to
+do with this thing?"
+
+"I can tell what I heard those----"
+
+"Don't tell anything yet a while; at least, not now. I want you to do
+this for me: After the fair closes go to that merchant who was so kind
+to you, and explain to him the whole affair, including your suspicions.
+Ask him to direct you to the best attorney in the county; get all the
+money from Mr. Sweet that may be needed, and pay the lawyer's fee. Send
+him to me as soon afterward as possible. It is nothing more serious than
+lying in jail a few days, and that won't be such a great hardship, now
+I've got this face on me."
+
+"Shall I----"
+
+"There is no need of saying anything more," Hazelton interrupted,
+fearing the boy was about to speak of the money the proprietor of the
+museum had hidden. "The merchant will understand and advise if you tell
+him everything--that is, I think he will; but in case he refuses, talk
+with some one else whom you can trust."
+
+As he finished speaking the fakir arose to his feet, motioned to the
+officer, and walked directly out of the tent without so much as bidding
+the others goodby.
+
+No one spoke until after he had been absent several minutes, and then
+Teddy asked, with a long-drawn sigh:
+
+"Do you think he will come out all right, Mr. Sweet?"
+
+"That's hard to say, for I don't know how much proof they may have
+against him. It's his business that has done a great deal toward
+inducing a magistrate to issue the warrant, for once a man shows himself
+to be a swindler, anything else can readily be believed of him."
+
+"But what about his money?" Dan asked.
+
+"That is to be handed over to Teddy."
+
+"What have I got to do with it?" the boy asked, in amazement.
+
+"He told us that as plainly as he dared to talk before the officer, and
+we'll count it out, after which his stock in trade shall be buried, for
+I want nothing to do with it."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+_A PROPOSITION._
+
+
+Teddy had the most decided objections to taking charge of Hazelton's
+money, and for several reasons. In the first place he did not want to
+have the responsibility, and again, the fact of its being in his
+possession seemed to make him a partner in the business.
+
+Mr. Sweet was determined, however. He insisted that Hazelton had stated
+this as plainly as was possible under the circumstances, and, despite
+the boy's protests, immediately began the transfer.
+
+"It shall be done in such a way that he can't accuse you of having taken
+any," the proprietor said, as he pulled the satchel from its
+hiding-place and broke the lock open with a hatchet. "We'll count it in
+the presence of all hands, and each one shall give Teddy a written
+statement of how much was found."
+
+An exclamation of surprise burst from Tim's lips as the receptacle was
+spread out on the ground, for it appeared to be literally crammed with
+money.
+
+Mr. Sweet separated the silver from the bank notes, spreading both on
+the ground where they could be seen by every person present, and then he
+counted them slowly, taking care that the spectators were following his
+every movement.
+
+"I make it three hundred an' forty-eight dollars," he announced. "If
+there's anybody here who ain't sure that's right, say so now."
+
+Each member of the party had seen the amount counted, and agreed with
+the result as declared by Mr. Sweet, who forthwith wrote the following:
+
+ We, the undersigned, have seen a valise belonging to Frank
+ Hazelton broken open, and certify that three hundred and
+ forty-eight dollars, the only money found therein, was handed
+ by Jacob Sweet to Edward Hargreaves in conformance with the
+ orders, as we understood them, from the said Frank Hazelton.
+
+"Now I want every one to sign that," Mr. Sweet said, as he handed his
+lead-pencil first to the barker, "and then Teddy and I will have some
+proof of the amount."
+
+It required quite a while for all to conform with the wishes of the
+proprietor of the museum, owing to the fact that several of the party
+were far from being skillful penmen, but the task was finally
+accomplished, and as the money was handed to Teddy, the latter asked,
+ruefully:
+
+"What shall I do with it? I'm afraid of losing so much."
+
+"That's a risk Hazelton is bound to take. Fasten it in your clothes
+somehow, an' be sure you don't get into any row where it can be stolen."
+
+By the aid of many pins, and with the assistance of both Dan and Tim,
+Teddy finally succeeded in disposing of the money about his person in
+such a way that it was not an unusual burden, and then Mr. Sweet
+insisted that all hands should try to get some rest in order to be fresh
+for the supposedly enormous amount of work to be done on the following
+day.
+
+Teddy lay down on the ground with the others, but it was many hours
+before his eyes were closed in slumber. Sam's untimely death, the
+guardianship of so much money, and his own business affairs all served
+to keep his eyes open until nearly midnight, when he fell into a sleep
+so troubled by frightful dreams that it was far from being restful.
+
+It seemed as if he had but just lost consciousness when Mr. Sweet
+aroused him with the information that the "big" day of the fair was
+breaking.
+
+"Turn out an' get your breakfast before sunrise, for on this morning the
+early bird will pick up many a penny while the lazy ones are yet in bed,
+an' fakirs must make hay when the sun shines."
+
+Teddy was on his feet in an instant, and half an hour later, having
+broken his fast, he was at the booth with his clerk and Dan, the latter
+volunteering his assistance until the exhibition buildings should be
+opened.
+
+The proprietor of the museum had advised him well; the receipts of the
+cane and knife boards were nearly five dollars before more than half of
+the booths were in condition for trade, because the trains were running
+unusually early in order to accommodate the crowds, and when Dan felt
+obliged to leave, business was so good that the proprietor, clerk, and
+assistant were all working industriously.
+
+"If I can get off I'll see you about noon," Dan said, as he walked away,
+and Teddy replied:
+
+"Be sure to come, for mother will be here, and I want you to meet her."
+
+From that time until nine o'clock the crowd increased in numbers, and as
+Teddy said during a lull in business, "it seemed as if the grounds were
+so full that no more could get in."
+
+When Mrs. Hargreaves arrived her son could pay little attention to her,
+but he proposed that she should amuse herself by looking at the
+different exhibits until nearly noon, when he stated that he would take
+an hour off, no matter how great a rush of customers might be around his
+booth.
+
+"I earned sixty dollars yesterday, an' before night I'll have a hundred
+more, so there's little doubt that this week's work as a fakir will
+enable me to pay all you owe on the house," he whispered, triumphantly,
+and his mother walked away, hardly daring to believe what Teddy had told
+her.
+
+During the next hour it seemed as if a steady stream of money was
+flowing into the box, and Teddy was feeling confident that Mr. Sweet's
+prediction would prove to be correct, when the one especial man he
+wanted to see came up with a folded paper in his hand.
+
+It was the merchant from Waterville, and he said, as he handed the
+document to the boy:
+
+"Here is the receipted bill, and I am more than glad to see you doing so
+well."
+
+"Can I talk with you for five minutes?" Teddy asked, hardly noticing the
+paper as he put it in his pocket.
+
+"As long as you want to. What is the matter? Running out of stock?"
+
+"Oh, no, your clerk made such a good selection for me that I've got all
+I shall need. This is something more important."
+
+Then Teddy hurriedly told the merchant how and where he had first met
+Hazelton; explained fully what the latter's business was; of the
+accusations made by Uncle Nathan; what he and Dan had heard and seen,
+and concluded by repeating the request made by the fakir as he was led
+away to jail.
+
+"Are you willing to do anything for him?" the boy asked, as his story
+was finished.
+
+"I can't say it is a matter which appeals very strongly to my
+sympathies, because of the swindles he perpetrated, but if it is an
+unjust accusation something should be done to help him. The one lawyer
+above all others who can be of assistance came over with me this
+morning. I will see him, and later in the day you shall have a call from
+us."
+
+"Before you go I wish you would take this money," Teddy said, earnestly.
+"It is too large an amount for me to carry around, and it will be safe
+with you."
+
+The merchant consented to take charge of Hazelton's ill-gotten gains,
+and Teddy felt decidedly relieved when the cash was in another's
+keeping, and he had nothing of more value than an acknowledgment of the
+same to look after.
+
+"In this matter I shall recognize no other order than yours," the
+merchant said when the transaction was concluded, "and if the fakir
+should succeed in regaining his liberty he must come to you for the
+necessary document.
+
+"I don't care how it is fixed so long as the money is not in my hands,"
+Teddy replied, in a tone of satisfaction, and then he was called upon to
+attend to another rush of customers, every one of whom was eager to be
+waited upon first.
+
+Another hour passed, and it was more evident than before that Mr. Sweet
+had been correct when he stated the sum which should be taken in at the
+cane-board.
+
+Teddy, having breakfasted early, was so hungry that he was on the point
+of going out to buy a supply of sandwiches, when another visitor
+arrived.
+
+This was no less a personage than Uncle Nathan, and he greeted his
+nephew with the utmost cordiality, as he said:
+
+"It looks to me as if you were makin' a power of money here, Teddy. I
+had no idea these triflin' games would so attract the people."
+
+Glad to be on pleasant terms with the old man once more, Teddy stated
+that they had been at work very hard since the first train arrived, and
+concluded by saying:
+
+"I took over sixty dollars yesterday, and Mr. Sweet says it'll come near
+to a hundred to-day."
+
+"Sixty dollars!" the old man cried. "Are you telling me the truth, Teddy
+Hargreaves?"
+
+"Of course I am, an' I've got the money in my pocket to prove it."
+
+"Why, at this rate you'll soon be a rich man, for you don't seem to lose
+much of the stock."
+
+"We buy a good many canes or knives back. When a man puts a ring over
+one that he don't want we take it in, and give him five more chances. In
+that way there is very little goes out compared to the amount of money
+received."
+
+Uncle Nathan looked around at the players for a moment, and then in a
+very confidential tone he whispered:
+
+"See here, Teddy, don't you want a partner? I'll pay for the stock you
+bought, an'----"
+
+"I've already done that out of yesterday's receipts," Teddy cried. "All
+the bills are settled, an' what comes in now is clear profit."
+
+"But suppose I stood here an' called up the people I know, don't you
+think it would make business better?"
+
+"And if it should, do you think we could attend to more customers? Every
+minute I talk with you is so much money lost, for the other fellers
+can't pick up rings an' make change fast enough."
+
+"Does that mean you don't want to go into business with me?" the old man
+asked, angrily.
+
+"No; but it means that there would be no reason for doing such a thing.
+I've got no debts, an' there are more customers than can be attended to
+on so small a board. If you'd made the proposition last Monday it would
+have been different, but now you can't expect me, after taking all the
+risk, to divide after the work has been done."
+
+"Who lent you the money to start, Teddy Hargreaves?" Uncle Nathan cried,
+his face growing purple with rage.
+
+"You did."
+
+"And how have you repaid such generosity? How----"
+
+"I gave you three dollars for the use of fifteen two days," was the
+prompt reply.
+
+"But how have you repaid me for remaining inactive after my money was
+stolen?"
+
+"That was something which did not concern me, therefore I had nothing to
+repay."
+
+"It has a great deal to do with you, as shall be shown before this day
+is ended, unless you consent to take me as an equal partner in this
+enterprise. Your friend in crime has been arrested, and I can swear that
+he turned over to you his ill-gotten gains. One word from me at this
+time and you will be in the same prison."
+
+The fact of his having been threatened before made Teddy bold, and he
+said, quietly:
+
+"I won't pay you for holding your tongue, Uncle Nathan, so do whatever
+you choose."
+
+"I will inform the authorities of all I have learned this morning, and
+we shall see what the result will be," the old man cried, in a fury, as
+he walked away, and despite the bold bearing he had assumed Teddy firmly
+believed that if the magistrate who issued the warrant for Hazelton's
+arrest should know he was in possession of the fakir's money, he would
+be brought before a bar of justice to explain matters.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI.
+
+WITH THE BURGLARS.
+
+
+It is well to look in upon Sam during his enforced vigil of Wednesday
+night.
+
+For at least two hours after the burglars had departed he thought of
+nothing save that he would soon be killed, and, perhaps, devoured by
+wild animals. Then the pain in his jaw and limbs became so great, owing
+to the tightly bound cords and his inability to move, that his
+sufferings overcame the fear to a certain extent, and he had not even
+the poor consolation of being able to give vent to an audible groan.
+
+Notwithstanding the mental and bodily torture he did sleep occasionally
+during the night, which appeared to be of twenty-four hours' duration,
+and never had he heard a sweeter sound than when his captors approached,
+the hum of their voices reaching him before the noise of their
+footsteps.
+
+The burglars were laden with packages of what appeared to be
+merchandise, and by the faint light of the coming day Sam could see
+that they looked heated and tired.
+
+"Well, how's our detective?" Long Jim asked, with a laugh, as he threw
+himself on the ground by the boy's side. "Has he decided to arrest his
+victims, or will he give them a little show of leaving the country?"
+
+As a matter of course Sam could not make any reply; but the expression
+in his eyes must have told of the suffering which he was forced to
+endure, for Phil said, as he began to untie the rope holding the gag in
+place:
+
+"There's no need of keepin' him trussed up any longer, an' I reckon
+it'll be a relief to have a chance to use his tongue once more."
+
+Even when he was free the prisoner was unable to do more than roll upon
+his side. His limbs were so stiff and cramped that he had no power over
+them, and he could not have risen to his feet just at that moment if his
+life had depended upon it.
+
+Jim seemed to think all this was very comical, for he laughed loudly at
+the prisoner's helplessness, and suggested that if he intended to follow
+the business of a detective to practice remaining in one position in
+order to avoid such a complete collapse when fortune should again be so
+unkind to him as she had been in this particular case.
+
+When the burglar's mirth finally ceased the two men lighted their pipes,
+and proceeded to enjoy a season of repose after so much fatiguing work,
+while Sam was left to recover as best he might.
+
+Fully half an hour elapsed before he succeeded in crawling to the brook
+where he quenched his thirst, and then his one desire was for sleep.
+
+Stretched out on the ground within a few feet of his captors the
+blissful unconsciousness of slumber came upon him, and the sun was high
+in the heavens before he awoke.
+
+Long Jim was seated on the turf, his back against a tree, and a quantity
+of food spread out in front of him; but Phil was not in sight.
+
+"Well, it strikes me you've been takin' things mighty comfortable," the
+man said, with a grunt. "Don't give yourself so far over to a life of
+pleasure as to forget that I promised to give you the greatest floggin'
+of your life before we part, for then you won't be so much surprised
+when it comes."
+
+The sight of the food caused Sam to realize how very hungry he was, and,
+regardless of the subject introduced by Jim, he asked, timidly:
+
+"Can't I have somethin' to eat?"
+
+"I don't think you can, my son. In the first place you haven't earned
+it, an' then, again, my partner an' I may need all the grub we've got on
+hand."
+
+Then, as if reconsidering his determination, the man selected two small
+crackers, tossing them to Sam as he cut a slice of boiled ham for
+himself.
+
+"That's more'n you deserve," he said, as the prisoner began to devour
+them eagerly; "so don't count on gettin' another bite to-day."
+
+Sam literally devoured the food, and then went once more to the brook to
+wash down the dry repast.
+
+It seemed as if the crackers increased rather than satisfied his hunger,
+and he watched Jim eagerly as the latter finished a generous meal of
+meat, cheese, and hard-boiled eggs.
+
+The burglar lighted his pipe, and paid no attention to the hungry boy,
+who now had ample time for reflection.
+
+He remembered that this was the important day of the fair, and pictured
+to himself Teddy and Dan at their work enjoying themselves at the same
+time they were making money. Then he thought of what he might be doing
+if the detective fever had not taken so firm a hold upon him, and,
+despite all efforts to prevent it, the tears coursed down his cheeks,
+plowing wide furrows in the dirt with which his face was encrusted.
+
+This painful revery was not prolonged. Shortly before noon Phil came
+into the hiding-place, his face wearing an expression of entire
+satisfaction.
+
+"I reckon we needn't be afraid any one will be here lookin' for us now
+our detective has been drowned," he exclaimed.
+
+"What's up?" Jim asked.
+
+"Hazelton, the fakir, has been arrested for the burglary at Peach
+Bottom, an' men are draggin' the creek to find the body of the boy who
+worked for the Davis Boat Company."
+
+Sam actually shuddered at the thought that people were looking for his
+corpse, and it gave him an "uncanny" feeling, this idea that he was
+numbered with the dead.
+
+"When was the arrest made?" Jim asked.
+
+"Last night. Old Nathan from the Run says the fakir turned over a lot of
+money to the boy who was goin' to buy your cane-board, an' it looks very
+much as if he would be locked up with the man whom people believe is his
+partner."
+
+"Nothin' said about what the cubs saw at the barn?"
+
+"Not a word."
+
+"Then we can count on havin' the balance of this week in which to leave
+the country."
+
+"As much as that, if not more. Another load will get the stuff together;
+but I've been thinkin' we'd better bury it here, an' not try to move a
+thing for a month or two."
+
+"In that case we'd be obliged to take that specimen along," and Jim
+pointed with a contemptuous gesture toward Sam. "It wouldn't do to let
+go of him while there was a chance of his givin' the game away."
+
+"I'll 'tend to that part of it, an' guarantee he won't be in condition
+to make us much trouble," Phil said so confidently that Sam began to
+shake as with an ague fit, for it seemed positive to him this burglar
+had decided upon his murder.
+
+"If things were so comfortable like why don't you try to make a dollar,
+for I reckon there's a big crowd at the fair?"
+
+"The grounds are packed; but it ain't exactly safe to do much business,"
+and Phil told of the assault upon Hazelton. "The whole boilin' of 'em
+now think everybody's tryin' to work some swindle," he added, "an' the
+consequence is that it would go hard with any feller who should slip up.
+We've done enough for one week, an' I'd rather not take chances till
+this stuff is off our hands."
+
+"Do you count on goin' back agin to-day?"
+
+"What's the use?"
+
+"I only asked, for you're managin' this whole thing now."
+
+"My idea was to sneak up alone to-night; take on the balance of the
+stuff, an' then lay low till Saturday evenin', when we'll make the big
+break."
+
+"It's goin' to be mighty dull business sittin' here with nothin' to do,"
+Jim replied, in a tone of complaint.
+
+"I don't see how we can fix it much quicker, unless we go to-morrow,
+while there are so many around."
+
+It was evident Jim did not relish the idea of leaving everything to his
+companion, and the latter so understood the expression on his friend's
+face, for he said, angrily:
+
+"You're cookin' up some foolish scheme now, an' in spite of all I can do
+to prevent it we'll probably succeed in gettin' nabbed before matters
+are arranged as they should be."
+
+"Oh, you're too smart, that's what ails you. Take all the soft snaps,
+an' leave me here to suck my thumbs without even the chance of movin'
+around."
+
+"If you think it's sich a snap to row up there an' back, why don't you
+try your hand."
+
+"That's jest what I'm willin' to do. Anything's better'n stayin' here,
+an' I'd like you to have a taste of it."
+
+Sam, who was expecting each moment to see the thieves come to blows,
+understood at once that this arrangement did not please Phil; but he
+made no further objection than to say:
+
+"If you wasn't so blamed careless I'd like to have you do a share of the
+hard work; but it's ten to one you'll contrive to let everybody know you
+are there."
+
+"I may not be so all-fired smart as you think you are, but I ain't quite
+a fool. Why, I've managed bigger things than this when you was around
+beggin' for something' to eat, 'cause you was too chicken-hearted to do
+this kind of work."
+
+"You'd better not say too much; I've stuck by you when worse men would
+have a' given you the cold shake, an' don't intend to take any guff,
+especially since I've had sich hard work to get us out of the scrape you
+jumped into."
+
+"I shall talk, an' if you don't want to listen, there are plenty of
+places to lay off in outside of this."
+
+Then the two thieves glared at each other several moments in silence,
+and finally Phil said, with a mirthless laugh:
+
+"We won't fight till this job is finished. Go an' get the balance of the
+stuff, an' we'll make a break whenever you are ready; but after one pull
+up an' back there'll be somebody besides me who'll think it hard work."
+
+Then, in order to heal the breach which had opened between them, Phil
+produced a suspicious looking black bottle from his pocket, and handed
+it without comment to his partner.
+
+"Why didn't you bring this out before, an' then, perhaps, the business
+would 'a' looked different?" Jim growled, as he drank long and deep;
+"but it won't make any difference about my goin' up the creek."
+
+"That's all right; I'm satisfied."
+
+As the two men began to drink a great hope sprang up in Sam's heart that
+they would become so stupefied by the liquor that he might make his
+escape. They had not thought it necessary to replace the bonds
+which had cost him so much suffering, and at the first signs of
+unconsciousness he resolved to make one dash for liberty, either by
+taking to the boat, or attempting to make his way toward the fair
+grounds on that side of the creek.
+
+There was no such good fortune in store for the prisoner, however. The
+men drank themselves into the most friendly humor, and then the supply
+of liquor was exhausted.
+
+After advising Jim not to start until sunset, Phil lay down to sleep,
+and Sam thought it wise to feign slumber also, lest the wakeful burglar
+should take it into his head to administer the promised flogging in
+order to pass the time more agreeably.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII.
+
+_A DISASTER._
+
+
+Teddy was decidedly uncomfortable in mind after Uncle Nathan departed.
+By a combination of circumstances which could not well have been
+avoided, he had been made to appear as a confederate of Hazelton, and if
+all the facts concerning his relations with the fakir should become
+known public opinion would he against him.
+
+He did not allow these forebodings to interfere with business, however.
+Customers were plenty; the nickels were coming in as rapidly as he could
+make change, and Tim had no hesitancy in saying that Mr. Sweet had set
+their receipts of one day considerably too low.
+
+"We've done twice as much as we did yesterday at this time, an' I'm
+countin' on gettin' twelve or fifteen dollars as my share of this day's
+work."
+
+"It looks as though you wouldn't be disappointed, and that's a fact. I
+wish I knew where we could get a few more canes, for we've lost quite a
+good many this morning."
+
+"There's no time to go to Waterville; but we can shorten the board by
+putting the uprights closer together, an' that'll make the layout look
+all right. Here comes your mother, an' if you want to go off with her
+I'll promise to keep things goin' here."
+
+That was exactly what Teddy did want to do. He felt that it was
+necessary she should know the true condition of affairs, and he could
+not talk with her confidentially near the cane-board, therefore when she
+came up he proposed that they walk toward the grand stand, where the
+Waterville band was doing its best to put in the shade the performances
+of the musicians from the Run.
+
+"You are looking worried, Teddy," Mrs. Hargreaves said, as they moved
+away in the proposed direction. "What is the matter? Isn't business as
+good as you expected?"
+
+"It is a great deal better; but Uncle Nathan has been here again, and
+this time I'm afraid it is in his power to do me some harm."
+
+Then Teddy told his mother all that had happened, explaining in detail
+the suspicions which might be aroused against him, and she was quite as
+disturbed as he when the recital was finished.
+
+"I will talk with him myself," she said, after some thought.
+
+"Don't do anything of the kind, for then he will be worse than ever,
+thinking he can frighten me into giving half of all I have made, and
+that I won't do, no matter how many warrants he gets out."
+
+"But Teddy, don't you think----"
+
+Mrs. Hargreaves was interrupted by a cry from a half-intoxicated man who
+halted directly in front of the young fakir, and shouted to some of his
+companions in the rear:
+
+"Here he is! This is the sneak who helped take that jewelry swindler's
+money away. I saw him then, an' can swear to his face."
+
+As a matter of course the tone as well as the words was sufficient to
+attract a crowd in this place where the throng was so dense that one
+could only make his way from one portion of the grounds to the other
+with the greatest difficulty, and for a moment, while Teddy stood unable
+to decide what should be said or done, every person looked at him
+threateningly.
+
+"His partner has been arrested, an' we'll serve him in the same way,"
+the man continued, as he advanced toward the boy.
+
+"Why do you want to talk to me like that?" Teddy cried, looking around
+in vain for a friend. "There are plenty of people here who know me, for
+I live down at the Run, an' never swindled anybody."
+
+"That's a lie!" the man replied, fiercely, seizing the boy by the
+collar.
+
+"It's the truth!" Mrs. Hargreaves cried. "I'm his mother, and we have
+lived at the Run ever since he was born. Deacon Jones is our neighbor,
+and he can answer for the truth of it."
+
+[Illustration: "I tell you to let go of him. He is an acquaintance"]
+
+"I'll see whether he can or not," and the bully was about to drag Teddy
+away, aided by his half-intoxicated friend, when a familiar voice from
+the outskirts of the crowd cried:
+
+"Hold on there! What are you about?"
+
+"I've caught the feller what sneaked away the jewelry swindler's money,
+an' am goin' to put him with his partner."
+
+"You are going to take your hand off his collar this instant, or get
+yourself into trouble," and the merchant from Waterville forced his way
+through the throng until he stood by Teddy's side.
+
+"Is that you, Mr. Reaves?" the bully asked, in surprise. "Well, you
+don't want to interfere in this business, for the boy is a bad one all
+the way through. He was deep enough to get the best of us yesterday; but
+he won't be so lucky now."
+
+"I tell you to let go of him. He is an acquaintance of mine whom I would
+trust a good deal sooner than some whom I see now."
+
+"But you are makin' a big mistake, Mr. Reaves, for I saw him makin' off
+with the valise where our money had been put."
+
+It was evident the bully had considerable respect for the merchant, for
+he released his hold on Teddy; but was determined that the boy's
+alleged character should be made known to all in the vicinity.
+
+"I happen to know all about that affair," Mr. Reaves replied, as he led
+Teddy and his mother out of the throng, "and if you want the full
+particulars of the affair come to my store when you are more sober than
+now."
+
+A very large number of those present were acquainted with the merchant,
+and for the majority his statement was sufficient to absolve Teddy of
+wrongdoing; but a few, among whom were the intoxicated party and his
+friends, vowed to sift the matter more thoroughly before the fair came
+to an end.
+
+Mrs. Hargreaves was terribly excited, and at once insisted that Teddy
+should go home with her immediately, regardless of how much money he was
+making; but Mr. Reaves said in a matter-of-fact tone, as if such
+incidents were of everyday occurrence:
+
+"It would be foolish for him to do that, more especially since it would
+be a tacit acknowledgment of guilt, and, besides, his business here is
+too valuable to be abandoned simply because a drunken rowdy chooses to
+make trouble. I was on my way to see him; I have found a lawyer who will
+under-take Hazelton's case, and he can at the same time give Teddy some
+good advice."
+
+Then the merchant introduced Mr. Harvey as the most prominent attorney
+in the county, and, offering Mrs. Hargreaves his arm, added:
+
+"We will go toward the cane-board, and give them an opportunity to talk.
+
+"There is a great deal to be said which cannot interest us, and when
+they are done we shall be readily found."
+
+The widow could do no less than comply, and as soon as they were
+comparatively alone the lawyer said to Teddy:
+
+"Now, I want you to begin and tell me the whole story from the time your
+money was stolen until this minute. Don't omit any particulars because
+you may chance to think they are not important; but give every detail,
+and thus I shall be made acquainted with your own case as well as that
+of Hazelton."
+
+Teddy obeyed this command to the letter. He dwelt upon the most minute
+transaction or trifling movement at sufficient length to give the
+listener a clear idea of all that had happened, and laid bare his own
+business affairs, even to the extent of making the lawyer acquainted
+with the amount of receipts each day.
+
+"I don't suppose it makes any difference what I think," he said, in
+conclusion; "but I am almost certain Mr. Hazelton did not have anything
+to do with the robbery, and even if I had suspected him, that which Dan
+and I heard while we were in the museum tent would have convinced me
+that the men whom we saw on the creek are the thieves."
+
+"I believe as you do, my boy, and will send a man to the barn you speak
+of this very night, although so much time has now elapsed that I have no
+hope of finding anything criminating. However, regardless of what may
+happen, I believe we can show that the fakir was not the guilty party,
+and, to guard against a possible attack by your uncle, it will be
+necessary to know exactly where we can get bail in case you should be
+arrested."
+
+"Then he can take me to jail?" Teddy asked, with quivering lips.
+
+"If he proves what he claims to know there is no question that he will
+be able to cause your arrest; but whether he can send you to prison is
+an entirely different matter. I would now like to have a talk with Mr.
+Reaves, and shall see you before I leave the grounds. Do not be
+frightened; but continue your business as usual, and in a few moments I
+will give you full particulars as to what must be done in the event
+anything happens."
+
+Teddy understood this to be an intimation that the interview was at an
+end, and he started toward the cane-board, the lawyer asking as he
+followed him:
+
+"How shall I find your friend Dan?"
+
+"Go down to the exhibit of the J. Stevens Arms and Tool Company in that
+yellow-roofed building, and you will see him showing model pocket
+rifles. I will go with you if you think there is any chance of missing
+him."
+
+"I can find him without difficulty. Do not leave your place of business
+until after I have seen you again."
+
+By this time they had arrived at the cane-board, where Mrs. Hargreaves,
+looking decidedly relieved in mind, was talking with Mr. Reaves.
+
+The lawyer invited the merchant to accompany him, and as the two walked
+away Mrs. Hargreaves said:
+
+"After talking with Mr. Reaves I will take back what I proposed
+regarding taking you home. It is not possible that anything but the
+right shall conquer in a case like this, and I believe you will come out
+all right, as a boy should who has always been as obedient and loving as
+you. It is time for me to be going now; but I will come back again in
+the morning."
+
+"Then take this money with you, for I don't want any more in my pockets
+than is absolutely necessary," and Teddy counted out the contents of the
+box which served him as a "safe."
+
+There was but little time for any lengthy leave-taking. The customers
+were plenty; Tim and his assistant had been working several hours
+without cessation, and Teddy felt that it was his duty to relieve them.
+
+"You can trust Mr. Reaves, whatever happens," his mother said, as she
+kissed him goodby, "and I shall be back to-morrow to learn if you are
+all right."
+
+"Don't worry about me," Teddy replied, cheerily. "Uncle Nathan can't
+have everything his own way, and he will soon discover that fact."
+
+It seemed to Teddy that his mother had but just left him, when a party
+of young men who had been talking in an apparently friendly manner
+directly in front of his place of business, suddenly began to quarrel,
+and before he was aware of what had happened his booth was overturned,
+and a fierce battle being waged upon the ground which he fancied
+belonged temporarily to him because of the money paid to the managers of
+the fair as rent.
+
+Canes, knives, rings, and timbers were thrown violently about, and,
+while trying to save the property, Teddy and his clerk received several
+severe blows intended for some of the combatants.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.
+
+_A SECOND ARREST._
+
+
+When the fight began Teddy's first thought was that it had been
+prearranged by some one who wanted to do him an injury without taking
+the chances of being arrested on a charge of malicious mischief.
+
+Tim believed it to be a scheme for robbing the money box, and while the
+combatants were struggling close around him he emptied the contents into
+his trousers pockets, regardless of the chance blows received meanwhile.
+
+That both were wrong in their conjectures could be told later, as the
+fight assumed the proportions of a small riot, and the battle ground was
+soon shifted to an open space in front of the exhibition buildings.
+
+It was nothing more than a causeless row such as is often witnessed at
+fairs where intoxicating beverages are sold, and which start from
+comparatively nothing, illustrating the proverb: "See what a great fire
+a little spark can kindle."
+
+"This is goin' to knock our hundred dollars in the head," Tim said,
+ruefully, as he began to gather up the scattered stock when the
+combatants had surged to and fro until they were some distance from the
+wrecked cane-board. "It'll take an hour to straighten things out, an'
+all that time will be the same as lost."
+
+"It might be worse," Teddy replied, philosophically, "and, besides, we
+shouldn't be able to do any business while that row is going on. If you
+hadn't thought of the money it might have been lost, for there were so
+many close around me that I couldn't get at the box."
+
+"Oh, if you want to pick somethin' good out of the trouble, I'll help.
+This will give us a chance to shorten the board so the stock won't look
+quite so small."
+
+The young fakirs were ready for business in considerably less time than
+they had fancied would be the case. Nearly every one on the grounds was
+attracted by the riot, and among those who came to the scene of the
+conflict was Dan.
+
+Instead of watching the struggling, yelling throng, he helped Teddy and
+Tim restore the booth to order, and with such aid as the assistant could
+give the work was done very quickly.
+
+Before the spectators had quieted down sufficiently to turn their
+attention to sport once more everything was ready for business, and when
+the constables had taken the ringleaders in the fight away, money began
+once more to roll into Teddy's coffers.
+
+Before Dan returned to his own work he heard of all that had occurred
+since morning, and his comments on Uncle Nathan's behavior were more
+forcible than polite.
+
+"He's an old fool what oughter be rode on a rail till he can't see, an'
+I'm goin' over to the Run before I start for home jest to give the
+duffer a piece of my mind."
+
+"I don't believe that would do either you or him any good," Teddy
+replied, laughingly.
+
+"I don't know what effect it'll have on him; but I'll feel a mighty
+sight better. He shows himself to be the worst swindler on the grounds
+when he tries to scare you into givin' him half you've made, for that's
+what his talk means."
+
+"If he don't do any worse than threaten I won't say a word; but he's so
+mad there's no knowin' what'll happen."
+
+"The lawyer will see that you pull through all right; but if trouble
+should come, be sure to send for me. I'll manage to get off somehow."
+
+With this assurance Dan hurried back to the exhibition buildings, and
+Teddy was free to assist Tim in waiting upon the customers.
+
+During the remainder of the afternoon the young fakirs had quite as much
+as they could attend to, and then, just as trade had so fallen off that
+Tim could wait upon the customers alone with the aid of the assistant,
+Teddy received a call from Mr. Harvey, the lawyer.
+
+"Come here behind the booth where we can talk without being overheard,"
+he said, peremptorily, and the boy obeyed at once, asking before the
+attorney had time to speak:
+
+"Do you know if Uncle Nathan is goin' to do anything?"
+
+"He is certainly trying very hard, and in case he should succeed in
+getting a warrant, you will demand of the officer who serves it to be
+taken directly to Deacon Jones. Mr. Reaves and I have just had a talk
+with him, and in our absence he will render such assistance as you may
+require."
+
+"That sounds as if you believed Uncle Nathan would be able to do as he
+threatened."
+
+"It is well to be prepared for any emergency, since no man can say
+exactly what may happen. During the night two constables will go to the
+barn on the marshes where you saw the burglars carry some of the goods,
+although I do not think any good is liable to result from the visit, for
+the men have probably been frightened away by this time. Enough may be
+found, however, to prove the truth of your story, and that will be
+sufficient to give the thick-headed authorities an inkling that their
+judgment as to who the burglars are is not infallible."
+
+"Have you seen Mr. Hazelton yet?"
+
+"No; but I shall call on him before going home. The best thing which
+could happen now for all concerned would be the arrest of the man you
+call Long Jim, and to that end both you and Dan must keep a sharp
+lookout, for it is barely possible he may be bold enough to come on the
+grounds again."
+
+"But what could we do in case we did see him?"
+
+"Follow him quietly until you meet a constable, and then insist that he
+be arrested for swindling you out of fifteen dollars. There is not
+sufficient proof to connect him with the robbery here or at the Run; but
+I will take care that he is held long enough as a common swindler to
+enable us to sift the other matter. Let me see, you said Dan was with
+you at the time of the transaction in Waterville?"
+
+"No; it was poor Sam, and now that he is dead I'm the only one who saw
+Long Jim there. Do you know if they have found Sam's body?"
+
+"I think not; men have been dragging the creek all day, and the
+probabilities now are that some time will elapse before it can be
+recovered. I want you to be very careful during the remainder of to-day
+and to-night. Go to the tent where you sleep before dark, and do not
+venture outside under any provocation, no matter what message may be
+brought."
+
+"What do you mean?" Teddy asked, in surprise.
+
+"Nothing particular; I am only taking precautions, that is all. I shall
+be here to-morrow, and will see you then."
+
+The lawyer turned to go, and had just passed out from behind the end of
+the booth when Teddy seized his arm, pulling him back very suddenly.
+"There's Long Jim now!" he whispered, excitedly. "See! That man over
+there by the striking machine!"
+
+It was indeed the burglar whose partner had warned him against visiting
+the fair, or even showing himself in the vicinity during the daytime. It
+could be plainly seen that he was decidedly under the influence of
+liquor, and he swaggered to and fro as if in his drunken brain was the
+idea that no one would dare cause him trouble.
+
+"Are you certain there is no mistake?" the lawyer asked, as he watched
+the man.
+
+"I'd be able to recognize him anywhere, no matter how he was dressed,
+an' so would Dan, for Sam an' me pointed him out two or three times."
+
+"Then the hardest portion of our work is finished. I shall have him
+arrested on the charge of swindling you, and can arrange it without the
+formality of first getting a warrant. It is now more necessary than ever
+that you should remain where I can find you readily at any hour of the
+day or night."
+
+"Except when I go for supper, I'll be here or in the tent," Teddy
+replied, and then there was no further opportunity for conversation.
+
+Long Jim had started leisurely, and on anything rather than a straight
+course, toward the grand stand, and Mr. Harvey followed so near that he
+could have placed his hand on the burglar's shoulder.
+
+Teddy watched until the two were lost to view amid the throng, and then
+said to himself, with a sigh:
+
+"I'll bet the lawyer can't find a constable, an' that Long Jim gets
+clear somehow. But what I don't understand is how he dares to come
+here."
+
+He would have run down to tell Dan of the startling news had it not been
+for Mr. Harvey's injunction to remain in the places designated, and he
+was so nervous that only with the greatest difficulty could he wait upon
+an impatient customer.
+
+An hour passed, and nothing had been heard from either the lawyer or the
+burglar.
+
+The visitors remained later on this day than usual; but the tardy ones
+were departing, and it was with a decided sense of relief that Teddy
+began to pack up his stock for the night. Dan arrived before the work
+was finished, and his excitement was great when he learned of what had
+happened.
+
+"Can't we go somewhere to find out if the man was arrested?" he asked,
+eagerly.
+
+"I promised to be on hand in case the lawyer should want me."
+
+"Then we'll get the stuff to the tent, go to supper, an' afterward I'll
+snoop 'round to hear the news."
+
+All hands worked rapidly, and in ten minutes the three boys were at the
+boarding-house, eating as if each moment were of the utmost importance,
+when they overheard a conversation between two men at the next table
+which caused them no slight degree of relief and pleasure:
+
+"Who was that drunken fellow Constable Ford lugged off this evening?"
+one of the men asked, and the other replied:
+
+"A man who swindled a boy over at Waterville out of fifteen dollars."
+
+"I didn't see any boy in the crowd."
+
+"He wasn't there. Lawyer Harvey recognized the fellow, and insisted on
+his arrest, sayin' that the 'Squire already knew about the case."
+
+"I thought at first it might be some one who had been robbing the stores
+around here."
+
+"Oh, the burglar has been caught already, an' laid in jail since
+yesterday."
+
+"But he was only arrested on suspicion."
+
+"There'll be proof enough to convict him, I reckon, an' if there isn't
+he ought to be sent to jail for six months because of what he has done
+on the grounds."
+
+Then the conversation was changed to a subject in which the boys had no
+interest, and Dan whispered to Teddy:
+
+"That settles Long Jim, an' now if your lawyer is as smart as he appears
+to be it won't take long to show that Hazelton didn't have anything to
+do with the burglar tryin' to get me in jail," Teddy replied, with a
+sigh.
+
+"Of course it will. Things are turning out all right after all, an' if
+poor Sam hadn't been drowned we'd have a reg'lar celebration to-night."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV.
+
+_A THIRD ARREST._
+
+
+When the boys returned to the museum tent from supper they had a long
+and interesting story to tell Mr. Sweet; but to their surprise, after
+the recital was concluded, he said calmly:
+
+"I knew all of that except about the burglar's arrest."
+
+"Why, how did you hear it?" Dan asked.
+
+"The lawyer an' the merchant have been over here twice since noon,
+pumpin' me about Hazelton, an' tryin' to find out how you boys have
+behaved yourselves."
+
+"Why did they want to know anything about us?" Teddy asked, in surprise.
+
+"So's to make sure your stories were straight. When men like them take
+hold of a thing they don't want to run any chances of bein' fooled. What
+has been done about Sam?"
+
+Dan could best answer this question, and he replied:
+
+"The body hasn't been found; but I heard the manager of the Davis Boat
+Company's exhibit say that he should keep men at the work of draggin'
+the creek till the work was finished. I can't get through my head how he
+happened to capsize the craft, for she didn't seem to be cranky."
+
+"That is something none of us will ever know," Mr. Sweet replied,
+solemnly, and then, as if to change the mournful subject, he asked: "How
+did business pan out to-day, Teddy?"
+
+"I'll count up. We must have come pretty near to what you predicted; but
+we would have done a great deal better if it hadn't been for the big
+row. That made us lose at least an hour, to say nothin' of havin' six
+canes broken just when we needed every one in order to make a good
+show."
+
+Then Teddy and Tim emptied the contents of their pockets on a piece of
+canvas, and the other occupants of the tent waited patiently for the
+result to be announced.
+
+"It's ninety-four dollars and forty-five cents," the former said, after
+counting the money twice as if doubtful of the first result. "That's a
+big sum of money, but there's no chance of a mistake."
+
+"You can figure that the row cost you six dollars," Mr. Sweet replied,
+puffing vigorously at his pipe. "I haven't been 'tendin' out on fairs
+these eight years without bein' able to name the amount of such a
+business as yours."
+
+"We'd have had twenty-five more but for that row," Tim said, decidedly.
+
+"You're wrong there, my boy," and the proprietor of the museum wore an
+air of one who "knows it all." "That is about as much as two boys can
+take in, an' you don't want to kick, for I've seen lots of fakirs come
+on to a fair ground with a better cane-board than yours an' not get
+expenses. Be thankful for what you've earned, an' hope that you can pay
+expenses to-morrow, for there won't be any too much money floatin'
+around after such a business as we've had to-day."
+
+"I'm more than satisfied," Teddy replied, as he set aside the amount due
+Tim, and the latter appeared to be more than contented with having
+earned nine dollars and forty-four cents so easily.
+
+"You can suck your thumbs from now out," the barker said,
+philosophically, "for the backbone of trade has been broken, an' the
+Peach Bottom fair is already numbered with the things of the past."
+
+"Don't you think we'll do anything more?" Teddy asked.
+
+"Oh, yes, there'll be a little to pick up until to-morrow night, but it
+won't amount to anything near like what has already been done, although
+it'll be clear profit."
+
+"Since I am more than satisfied, there's no chance of being
+disappointed," Teddy replied, and at that moment the head of a stranger
+appeared between the flaps of canvas.
+
+"Is there a boy named Teddy here?" the newcomer asked.
+
+"Well, what do you want of him?" and Mr. Sweet sprang to his feet as if
+anticipating trouble.
+
+"Nothing more than what Hazelton wanted me to say," was the reply, as
+the stranger entered, evidently thinking his search was at an end.
+
+"And what is that?" the proprietor of the museum asked, motioning Teddy
+to remain silent.
+
+"There's no need of all this secrecy with me, for I'm Hazelton's partner
+in everything except the give-away game," the stranger said, with a
+laugh. "It appears a man has been arrested by a party whom this boy
+Teddy knows, and I'm to say that he is to come to jail very early
+to-morrow morning."
+
+Even now Mr. Sweet's suspicions were not allayed, and he asked,
+cautiously:
+
+"Could you tell me what he's wanted for?"
+
+"Lawyer Harvey will be there, and is going to talk with him where
+Hazelton can hear what is said."
+
+"Is that all?"
+
+"Everything; and if you see the boy, can I depend on your repeating the
+message?"
+
+"Under the circumstances there can be no harm in taking every
+precaution," the proprietor of the museum replied, "and if your errand
+is finished, I may as well say that this is the boy Teddy whom Hazelton
+sent you to see."
+
+"That's all right; there was no need of pointing him out; but since you
+have done so, I simply want to ask if he can spare the time to do as
+Hazelton and the lawyer wish?"
+
+"Of course I can," and now Teddy spoke for himself. "Say that if nothing
+happens I'll be there."
+
+"Have you heard whether your uncle has succeeded in getting a warrant?"
+the stranger asked.
+
+"No; but Mr. Harvey seemed to think he might be able to do so, and I
+don't want to make any promises that can't be carried out."
+
+"Then I'll count on your being there, but since leaving the jail I've
+heard enough to warrant my advising you to remain under cover to-night."
+
+"Why?"
+
+"Those fellows who started the fight when you got away with the money
+are swearing vengeance. I don't think it's likely they'll attack the
+tent, for, owing to the representations made by the lawyer, there'll be
+a big force of constables on duty to-night; but if you should venture
+outside the grounds it might be impossible to keep any engagement in the
+future."
+
+"I wasn't thinkin' of leaving here," Teddy replied; but the mere fact
+that he ought not do so made him feel very uncomfortable.
+
+"I couldn't be in any worse fix if I had committed some big crime," he
+said, bitterly, "and it is tough to feel like a criminal when a fellow
+is only trying to earn honest money."
+
+"It isn't the rule that honest people fare the best," the stranger
+replied, with a laugh; "but I hope you'll come out on the top of the
+heap. At all events, my business here is finished and I'll go."
+
+The folds of canvas dropped behind him, and Mr. Sweet said, musingly:
+
+"It beats all how you boys have succeeded in getting yourselves mixed up
+in this affair. If I didn't know all the circumstances I'd say there
+must be some fire where there is so much smoke."
+
+"The smoke isn't of our makin', an' Teddy's uncle can be blamed for the
+most of it," Dan said, angrily. "I only wish he was here to know my
+opinion of him."
+
+"Are you talkin' about me?" Uncle Nathan asked, as he pushed aside the
+canvas and entered without so much as asking permission.
+
+"That's exactly what I was doing," Dan replied, without any show of
+fear, "an' if you've been sneakin' 'round to listen, there's no need of
+my tellin' over ag'in jest what I think of a man who tries to frighten
+an honest boy into givin' up half of what he has made."
+
+"An honest boy?" the old man repeated, with a sneer, and Teddy whispered
+to his friend:
+
+"Don't say anything to make him angry, for I'll only get the worst of
+it."
+
+"Of course you will," Uncle Nathan replied, having overheard the words.
+"When an ungrateful wretch like you conspires to rob the hand that has
+fed him he must expect to get the worst of it."
+
+"I never took from you the value of a cent," Teddy said, stoutly, and
+Dan cried as he sprang to his feet:
+
+"If there has been any attempt at robbery, you're the guilty one, for
+you've tried to steal half the money he made by threatening to have him
+arrested if he didn't divide his profits."
+
+"That was only a business proposition," the old man replied, not in the
+least abashed, "and he has aided others in stealing from me."
+
+"What do you want here?" Mr. Sweet cried, angrily. "This is my tent; I
+have paid for the privilege of putting it upon these grounds, and have
+the right to prevent such old hypocrites as you from entering without
+paying an admission."
+
+"Look out that you do not come within reach of the law," Uncle Nathan
+replied, threateningly, stepping back quickly, as if expecting an
+attack. "I am here armed with the right to take this boy, and shall
+exercise it despite all that may be said. Come in, Mr. Officer."
+
+In response to this call a constable entered, and Teddy's heart sank
+within him, for he understood that the long-deferred arrest was about to
+be made.
+
+"There is your prisoner," the old man said, vindictively, as he
+pointed to the boy, "and the sooner you take him to jail where he
+belongs the sooner we shall be rid of a viper."
+
+[Illustration: As the constable approached him, Teddy said, "I demand to
+be first taken to Deacon Jones!"]
+
+Teddy's grief and fear were so great that he could not speak, and even
+Dan appeared to have been made dumb by this show of authority; but Mr.
+Sweet was somewhat accustomed to such scenes, and he demanded:
+
+"Show me the warrant. I do not propose to let any one be taken out of my
+tent by such an old reprobate as that until I am satisfied it is done
+under the sanction of the law."
+
+"Convince yourself," Uncle Nathan replied, as the constable held out a
+folded document. "That will show under what authority we act."
+
+Sweet read it carefully, and handed it to the officer as he said to the
+old man:
+
+"This shows that the constable has the right to take Teddy to prison;
+but as certain as there will be a sun in the sky to-morrow so certain
+will I aid him in making you suffer for doing this thing. You know he
+had nothing to do with the burglary committed at your store, and have
+only had this issued in the hope of defrauding him of what he has earned
+honestly."
+
+"Talk is cheap," Uncle Nathan said, impatiently. "Officer, take your
+prisoner away unless you count on stayin' here all night."
+
+The short parley between the proprietor of the museum and the accuser
+gave Teddy time to think of what the lawyer had said, and he added, as
+the constable approached him:
+
+"I demand to be first carried to Deacon Jones'."
+
+"Now what kind of a bee have you got in your bonnet?" the old man cried,
+displaying both surprise and fear. "I say you are to go to jail, an'
+that settles it."
+
+"If he wants to see the deacon I'm bound to take him there," the
+constable said.
+
+"Who's been makin' sich foolish talk to you?" Uncle Nathan screamed.
+
+"Lawyer Harvey told me what the law was, an' I don't intend to get into
+any fuss by deprivin' a prisoner of his rights," was the stolid reply.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV.
+
+ON BAIL.
+
+
+When Uncle Nathan learned that the celebrated lawyer had made
+preparations for this move on his part he was literally beside himself
+with rage, and vowed that the warrant should be served and the prisoner
+taken to jail immediately, or he would see to it that the constable was
+deprived of his commission without delay.
+
+"I've served the warrant," the man said, quietly, "an' now the prisoner
+is in my custody. You have no more to say what shall be done with him
+than that goat, so shut your mouth."
+
+"I'll shut yours so close it won't be opened again for a month!" the old
+man screamed. "Do as I tell you, or take the consequences."
+
+"And I'm goin' to give you the same advice," Mr. Sweet cried, as he
+advanced toward Uncle Nathan threateningly. "Now the boy has been
+arrested, you are an intruder here, an' I'll give you thirty seconds in
+which to get out; after that we'll make an example of such a reprobate."
+
+"I'll go when I get ready, an' not a minute before. Lay a hand on me
+an' I'll have a warrant for you."
+
+"If you can get it, well and good. I now order you out for the last
+time. In thirty seconds I'll guarantee you won't be in condition to
+walk."
+
+While their employer had been speaking the barker and the clown silently
+ranged themselves by his side, ready for any commands which might be
+given, and the infuriated old man had sufficient sense left to let him
+understand it would be unsafe to linger.
+
+"I'll serve you out before this thing is ended," he cried, shaking his
+fist in impotent rage as he went toward the flap, and Dan, who could
+control himself no longer, replied:
+
+"You'd better begin on me, for I'm goin' to tell this thing to everybody
+who comes to the fair to-morrow, an' from what I've heard it wouldn't
+take much coaxin' to get the band from the Run up here, so's I could
+sing it. You're havin' a good time now; but there'll be a different side
+to the matter to-morrow."
+
+Mr. Sweet had followed Uncle Nathan so closely, literally turning him
+out, that he could not reply while inside the canvas; but once in the
+open air, he made threats that would have frightened any one who did not
+know the motive by which they had been inspired.
+
+Meanwhile the constable appeared disposed to take matters in the most
+comfortable manner. He asked Teddy why he wished to see Deacon Jones,
+and the boy said:
+
+"I don't know; but Mr. Harvey told me that if anything happened to-night
+I was to see the deacon."
+
+"Then we'll go there. Are you ready?"
+
+Teddy thought of his money, and, fearing lest it might be taken from
+him, asked if he could hand something to Mr. Sweet.
+
+"I think not," was the undecided reply. "The deacon will know, an'
+whatever he says I'll stand by."
+
+"Don't bother about anything just now," the proprietor of the museum
+said. "We'll all go with you, an' there'll be plenty of time to make
+necessary arrangements before you're taken to jail."
+
+Although the lawyer had assured him he could be involved in no serious
+trouble, the mere fact that he was under arrest sufficed to make Teddy
+wretched, and like one under sentence of death, he prepared to accompany
+the constable.
+
+Dan and Tim intended to join the party, as was shown by their remaining
+very close to the prisoner, and only the barker and the clown were left
+to care for the tent.
+
+Uncle Nathan was met on the outside, and he immediately began to insist
+that the boy be taken to jail at once; but the officer paid no attention
+to his ravings.
+
+"If you don't hold your tongue I'll knock the whole top of your head
+off," Mr. Sweet whispered, brandishing his fists in the most threatening
+manner, and the old man cried, excitedly:
+
+"Mr. Officer, I call upon you to bear witness that this man is
+threatening my life, and insist that you protect me from insult."
+
+"I've nothing to do with you," the constable replied, with a laugh. "The
+warrant has been served, an' all you've got to do is hold your horses
+till the case is called up in court."
+
+"Wait till I get home once more, an' then we'll see that he's got a good
+deal to do with the case," Tim cried. "I'll spend every minute from then
+for a week tellin' the folks that he only did this to make Teddy give up
+half of what he made, an' it'll be a pretty poor kind of a chump who'll
+do any more tradin' at his store."
+
+Uncle Nathan stepped toward the boy who had spoken so boldly as if he
+would inflict the direst punishment then and there; but he probably
+realized that this would prejudice his case, and contented himself by
+saying:
+
+"We'll see whether the people at the Run will believe a couple of boys
+who have been in league with burglars, for you mustn't forget, Tim
+Jones, that I have proof you helped Teddy to carry away the burglar's
+money."
+
+"If it'll do you any good I'll own up to the fact now," the boy
+replied. "It can't be so bad to do that as it is to arrest your own
+nephew because he won't give you half his money."
+
+"Don't say anything more," Teddy whispered to his friend. "It's only
+makin' matters worse, an' he's got the upper hand of us all jest now."
+
+"I don't know whether he has or not," the valiant Tim replied; "but at
+the same time it'll do him a world of good to let him hear the truth."
+
+At this point Uncle Nathan appeared to understand that he was not coming
+out victor in this battle of tongues, and he wisely held his peace,
+saying not another word until the little party arrived at the home of
+Deacon Jones.
+
+The manager of the fair was resting after a particularly hard day's
+work. More than one of the citizens of Peach Bottom had openly said he
+was responsible for the riot by allowing liquor to be sold on the
+grounds, and his greeting of the visitors was not calculated to assure
+the frightened Teddy.
+
+"Well, what do you want?" he cried, roughly, as they entered his
+library. "If it's anything concerning the fair I won't open my mouth. A
+man can't be driven to death with work and then disturbed at all hours
+of the night, simply to give the fools in this town a chance to make
+trouble."
+
+"All I know about it is that I arrested this boy, and he insisted on
+being brought to you, saying it was Lawyer Harvey's advice," the
+constable began, and the angry deacon immediately began to appear
+interested.
+
+"Is this your nephew, Nathan?" he asked of the old man, who now had a
+smirk of confidence on his face.
+
+"I'm sorry he is, deacon, an' after I set him up in business he goes
+ag'in me by givin' information to burglars, who rob me."
+
+"And you have had him arrested?"
+
+"I felt obliged to in the interest of society."
+
+"That's a lie," Mr. Sweet interrupted, angrily. "He tried to make the
+boy pay him half he earned on the fair grounds, and has done this thing
+only because Teddy refused."
+
+"We won't go into the details of the case, because I am not a
+magistrate," the deacon replied, with a majestic wave of the hand. "Mr.
+Officer, tell the 'Squire that I am prepared to go bail to any amount,
+and ask if the business can't be conducted here, for I'm too tired to go
+out of doors unless it is absolutely necessary."
+
+"What?" the old man screamed. "Will you answer for that little villain's
+appearance at court?"
+
+"That's what I said, Nathan. This affair is none of my business other
+than I have stated; but I must say you are goin' a leetle too far, not
+only in my opinion, but in that of others, an' it may prove a costly job
+for somebody before it's finished."
+
+The old man was literally speechless.
+
+He could not understand why the deacon should have turned against him so
+suddenly, and the last words made him decidedly uneasy.
+
+He was not to be silenced without a struggle, however. After the first
+surprise had died away he said, with a comical assumption of dignity:
+
+"I will see whether I'm to be browbeaten in this manner. The 'Squire
+does not dare to release the boy on bail, and I shall tell him so."
+
+With these words he left the house hurriedly, and the constable said to
+the deacon:
+
+"If you will write a line to the 'Squire, saying that you're ready to go
+bail, I do not think there will be any necessity of troubling you again
+to-night."
+
+This suggestion was immediately acted upon, and the weary manager of the
+fair penned the following words:
+
+ I am ready to enter security to any amount for the appearance
+ at court of Edward Hargreaves, and if you should not consider
+ my bond sufficient, I am empowered to say that John Reaves, of
+ Waterville, will add his name, therefore there can be no good
+ reason for committing him to jail, since we are both
+ responsible for the prisoner until the bond can be executed.
+
+ A. JONES.
+
+Having received this the constable departed with the prisoner and his
+friends, and once on the outside he said, confidently:
+
+"The matter is settled, no matter how much old Nathan may rave. Both Mr.
+Reaves an' the deacon have got the 'Squire by the nose, and he must
+dance to their fiddlin'."
+
+That this assertion was correct Teddy realized a few moments later when
+he was ushered into the 'Squire's dining-room, and the latter, without
+paying the slightest attention to the prisoner, said to the officer:
+
+"I have just heard that you served the warrant I issued, and then took
+the boy to Deacon Jones' house. Is that correct?"
+
+"Straight as a string, 'Squire. Lawyer Harvey told him if anything
+happened to go there, an' I thought he had a right to look up bail
+before being lugged off to jail. Here's what the deacon's got to say
+about it."
+
+The 'Squire took the paper which the officer held out, and after reading
+it, said benignly:
+
+"You were quite correct in doing what you did, Mr. Constable. This is
+quite sufficient guarantee that he will be produced when wanted, and you
+may let him go. Give me the papers, and I will indorse them."
+
+After this formality had been gone through with the constable said to
+Mr. Sweet:
+
+"That settles the matter so far as Teddy is concerned, and with such men
+as the deacon, Mr. Reaves, and Lawyer Harvey to back him, I don't
+believe old Nathan will make any too much out of this job."
+
+"You are free to go where you please," the 'Squire added, and the young
+fakir with his friends left the house, wondering very much at the amount
+of influence which, unsolicited, had been exerted in Teddy's behalf.
+
+As for the boy himself, he was far from feeling comfortable in mind.
+Unless the burglary could be brought home to Long Jim it did not seem
+possible that Hazelton could be set free, and this last was absolutely
+necessary in order to establish his own innocence.
+
+It was a great consolation for him to be with such good friends,
+however, and each in turn tried to cheer him, but without success until
+Mr. Sweet said:
+
+"There's no question of your getting out of the scrape with flying
+colors, and to celebrate I'm goin' to give a regular dinner party to
+every decent fakir on the grounds. Come over, boys, an' help me get
+ready. Business has been so good to-day that I can afford to indulge in
+a little extravagance."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI.
+
+_THE FAKIRS' PARTY._
+
+
+The idea of a party in the museum tent, where there would be no guests
+save fakirs, struck Teddy as being very comical, and he laughed heartily
+despite the fact that he was still virtually a prisoner in the meshes of
+the law; but at the same time he did not think Mr. Sweet was really in
+earnest when he made the proposition.
+
+It was not many moments, however, before he understood that the party
+was to be given in the most elaborate manner possible.
+
+On arriving at the tent Mr. Sweet sent the bouncer out with invitations
+to such of the fakirs as remained on the grounds all night, or lived in
+the immediate vicinity, and at the same time the clown started for the
+town in order to purchase refreshments.
+
+"Now, you boys are to take right hold an' help the best you know how,"
+the proprietor of the museum said as he pulled off his coat and vest
+preparatory to making ready for the feast. "If them as comes want to sit
+down it must be on the ground, owing to the lack of chairs, therefore
+it don't make much difference if the table is a trifle high."
+
+[Illustration: "We have only one knife," said Mr. Sweet, to the
+amusement of the boys, "and it must serve for all hands."]
+
+To the surprise of the boys he proceeded to convert the wagon into a
+"festal board" by first pulling it into the center of the tent, and then
+removing the sides. Over the floor of this newspapers were spread, and
+two plates, three forks, one knife, and four tin dippers were placed on
+the impromptu cloth.
+
+"The provisions will be cut ready for eating," Mr. Sweet explained, "so
+one knife must serve for all hands, and it won't hurt any of the crowd
+if they're obliged to take turns using the dippers."
+
+The clown returned before the guests began to assemble. He brought cold
+sausage, sliced ham, cold fried potatoes, sweet crackers, cake, pie, and
+a quantity of lemons and sugar.
+
+Contrary to his expectations, Mr. Sweet did not think this assortment
+sufficient for the kind of a dinner he proposed to give, and the
+messenger was forced to return in search of cheese, pickled pig's feet,
+sardines, and milk for the coffee.
+
+Matters were in a decided state of confusion when the first of the
+guests arrived. Mr. Sweet, not troubled by the absence of dishes, had
+placed the various articles on the wagon-table in the brown paper
+coverings as they had been received, and it was upon his skill as a
+maker of coffee that he based his reputation as a host.
+
+Therefore everything was neglected for this one important thing, and the
+proprietor was standing over the oil stove with a look of grave
+responsibility on his face when the owner of the envelope game and his
+assistant arrived.
+
+"The boys will take care of you," he said, hurriedly, bending over the
+huge pot to inhale the odor, in order to know exactly how the berries
+were adapting themselves to the infusion, and, much to his surprise,
+Teddy found himself the one especial feature of the party.
+
+All on the ground had evidently heard of his arrest, for each new
+arrival asked concerning the events of the evening, and, what was more
+to the purpose, so far as he was concerned, all seemed to think his
+troubles were only temporary.
+
+"You'll come out of it all right," the manager of the largest sandwich
+booth said, confidently, as he entered with his hat on one side of his
+head and a cigar held in his mouth at an angle of forty-five degrees. "I
+heard of your uncle last year, when he tried to make trouble for a
+friend of mine in the spittoon game, an' you can bet your bottom dollar
+that the people here are not going to take much stock in what he says."
+
+"It seems they did, so far as to issue a warrant for my arrest," Teddy
+replied, with a mirthless smile.
+
+"But that won't amount to anything. I hear you have got John Reaves as
+a friend, an' he comes pretty near runnin' things to suit himself in
+Peach Bottom. He helped my friend out of the scrape your uncle put him
+into, an' folks say there's no love lost between him an' Nathan
+Hargreaves."
+
+"I want to get out of my trouble simply on the ground that I am not
+guilty," Teddy replied. "If I am charged with aiding burglars, there's
+precious little consolation in being set free simply because people do
+not like the man who made the charge."
+
+"Nobody believes you guilty, and for the matter of that I'm certain
+Hazelton had nothing to do with the job. His game ain't exactly square;
+but he don't go around breaking into stores."
+
+Teddy was on the point of telling that Long Jim had been arrested
+because of the burglaries committed; but he remembered in time that this
+fact was as yet a secret, and remained silent.
+
+The man who leased the only "Great African Dodger" was the next to
+arrive, and he also seemed to think it necessary to condole with the
+young fakir in his troubles, as did the remainder of the guests, and by
+the time all were assembled Teddy began to think his experience was only
+such as every other person in the tent had undergone at some time in his
+career.
+
+"You see this is the way the matter stands," the whip man said,
+confidentially, while Mr. Sweet was bending all his energies to mixing
+the lemonade. "People think fakirs are the worst class of men in the
+world, whereas, if the matter was sifted right down, they'd find the
+class as a whole was honest because they couldn't afford to be
+otherwise. I'm not talking now about those who run strong games, like
+Hazelton; but ourselves who do a legitimate business. You've got canes
+an' knives to sell, while I deal in whips; now all we want is a fair
+show to dispose of our goods, an' we know everything must be done on the
+square, or there's bound to be trouble sooner or later, consequently we
+keep straight, an' take all the abuse which those who have come to
+swindle the folks deserve. Why, what, I ask you, would the managers of
+these fairs do if they couldn't get us to come up with our money for
+privileges? They couldn't pay expenses, an' that's the whole amount of
+the story. They run after us, an' yet when we come there's the same old
+howl about swindlers."
+
+The man talked until he was literally forced to stop for lack of breath,
+and Teddy had not so much as spoken; but proved a good listener, which
+was all his condoler appeared to expect of him.
+
+When the clown returned with the last installment of eatables there was
+nothing to prevent the assembled crowd from partaking of Mr. Sweet's
+hospitality. The coffee was done to a turn; the lemonade was neither too
+sour nor too sweet, and the proprietor of the museum summoned his
+guests to the feast by saying:
+
+"Now turn to an' fill yourselves up. It ain't often I do this sort of
+thing; but somehow or other I've got a reg'lar admiration for our
+cane-board fakir, an' after comin' out as he has to-night it seems only
+right we should kinder spread ourselves. There's no liquor in the tent,
+which is as it should be, for I'm a temperance man, an' them as wants it
+can make hogs of themselves somewhere else. Take hold hearty, an'
+remember that this layout is in honor of them as did a good turn to the
+whole gang by savin' the lives of the women what would likely have
+drowned if there hadn't been any fakirs in the country."
+
+This was an unusually long speech for the proprietor of the museum, and
+when it was ended he set an example to his guests by attacking the
+eatables as if he had not indulged in a square meal since the fair was
+opened.
+
+Each person present imitated him, and Tim whispered to Teddy, when his
+mouth was so full of cake that it was only with the greatest difficulty
+his words could be understood:
+
+"This is what I call a great snap, an' when I've been fakin' at the
+fairs long enough to get some money ahead I'll give fellers like us a
+good chance to fill up, the same as Mr. Sweet has done."
+
+Dan was equally enthusiastic. In all his experience, which extended
+over two years at the very least, he declared that he had never seen so
+much done for a boy, and concluded by saying:
+
+"There's no question, Teddy, but that you're a big gun here, an' I'll
+advise you to keep right on in this business."
+
+"I've had enough of it," was the reply. "Such times as these are very
+nice; but think of what may happen when I'm brought up for trial. Who
+knows but Uncle Nathan can succeed in makin' folks think I'm guilty of
+helpin' the burglars, an' then what'll be the consequences?"
+
+"I know he can't do anything of the kind, an' that's enough," was the
+confident reply; but yet it failed to satisfy the boy who had been bound
+over to appear at court.
+
+The entire party appeared to be having the jolliest kind of a jolly
+time; but ever before Teddy's mental vision came the picture of himself
+in prison, and even the fact that Long Jim had been arrested failed to
+render him confident as to the final result.
+
+Again and again was he called upon to reply as one after another wished
+him good luck in the case, and the amount of lemonade which was consumed
+on each occasion caused the clown to make a third visit to the town in
+order to purchase the wherewithal to satisfy the demands of the guests.
+
+It was nearly midnight when the last of the revelers departed and the
+boys were called upon to help set the interior of the tent to rights.
+
+"It hasn't been sich a bad time after all," Mr. Sweet said, musingly, as
+Teddy and Dan aided him in wheeling the wagon into place. "A man can
+remember an evening like this with pleasure, when liquor has been kept
+out of the bill of fare, an' who shall say that we're not better off
+than if our legs were so tangled as to make walking an impossibility?"
+
+The barker's red nose was slightly elevated, much as if its owner could
+explain why spirits were superior to lemon-juice and water; but Mr.
+Sweet's question remained unanswered, and the party set about making the
+final preparations for the night.
+
+"Poor Sam ain't here to be troubled by the goat, so we can set him
+loose," the proprietor of the museum said as he unfastened the rope from
+the neck of his pet.
+
+"He'll have a great time pickin' up odds an' ends between now an'
+daylight, an' then feel so lazy that it'll be hard work to make him do
+his tricks."
+
+"Do you suppose Uncle Nathan will be around in the morning?" Teddy asked
+as he lay down by the side of Dan and Tim.
+
+"Not a bit of it; he got sich a dose to-night that I don't count on
+seem' him ag'in till this fair is ended, an' then I'm going to take a
+trip over to the Run for the express purpose of givin' him a piece of
+my mind."
+
+"But suppose he should come, what shall I say?"
+
+"Pay no attention to the old fool, an' above all, don't let him trap you
+into talking. Mr. Harvey will be here to-morrow, an' he can post you
+better than ever I could."
+
+"Don't fuss about the thing at all," Dan replied, philosophically.
+"There's plenty here who know you hadn't anything to do with the
+burglaries, an' he won't have as much as a friend by the time the trial
+is ended."
+
+"Dan comes pretty nigh being right," Mr. Sweet added, "an' now I want
+all hands to go to sleep, for there's one more day of this fair, an' we
+need to be somewhere near fresh, because to-morrow the dollars won't
+tumble without a good deal of coaxing. Good-night."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII.
+
+_IN HIDING._
+
+
+That the incidents may be related as nearly as possible in the order of
+their occurrence it is time to return to the spot where the burglars are
+in hiding.
+
+It will be remembered that we last saw Sam after Phil had fallen asleep,
+and he was feigning unconsciousness lest Long Jim, having nothing else
+to do, should take it into his ugly head to administer the promised
+flogging.
+
+Although Sam's eyes were apparently closed, he took good care to keep
+strict watch on the burglar; but for what seemed a very long time he saw
+nothing to cause any apprehensions, and was just on the point of going
+to sleep in reality when Jim asked, as he gave the boy a vicious kick on
+the side:
+
+"Where's the grub?"
+
+"I don't know. You put it away after finishing your dinner."
+
+"Oh, I remember now," and the burglar, still considerably more than half
+stupefied by the amount of liquor he had drunk, arose to his feet so
+unsteadily that it seemed as if only the lightest touch would be
+necessary to send him headlong.
+
+After a short search the man found that which he wanted, and proceeded
+to make a hearty meal, regardless of the hungry glances which the boy
+bestowed upon him.
+
+"Don't think I'm goin' to give you any," he said, with a leer, as he
+concluded the repast, "You're lucky to be alive, an' that's enough for
+sich a duffer. I'll put this stuff back, an' you'll have every bone in
+your body broken if you so much as smell of it."
+
+Sam made no reply. He had already learned that there are very many times
+when silence is indeed "golden."
+
+"I've made up my mind to see what can be done at the fair," Jim said, as
+he lighted his pipe with great deliberation. "Phil thinks he's the only
+smart man in the world, an' it's time to show him what a mistake he's
+been makin' all his life. Why don't you say something?" he cried,
+angrily, as Sam continued silent.
+
+"I don't know what you want me to say. If you're goin' that settles it;
+I sha'n't be any better off."
+
+"You can stake your life on that, for while I'm a gentleman an' behave
+myself as such, Phil is a reg'lar brute, an' will make things mighty
+uncomfortable for a sneak like you."
+
+Sam thought, but was very careful not to say, that it was hardly
+possible for a boy to have a worse master than the alleged gentleman in
+front of him, and the burglar continued, as he arose to his feet:
+
+"I want to leave without wakin' Phil, but you must do it as soon as I
+push off from the shore, for we don't intend to give you a chance of
+slipping away. I shall watch mighty close, an' if he isn't on his feet
+before I'm a dozen yards out into the creek you'll get a reminder from
+this," and the man ostentatiously displayed a revolver.
+
+"I don't count on runnin' off," Sam, replied, thoroughly frightened by
+the threat. "I can stay here till you get ready to let me go, because
+I've got to, an' I'm not sich a fool as to git into any worse scrape."
+
+"Now you're talkin' somethin' like sense, an' if you keep on in this way
+I'll see to it that you don't have any harder time than a detective
+oughter expect; Phil will be on his ear when he knows I've gone, an' you
+must tell me all he says. Remember that if he isn't on his feet before
+I've got beyond range, I'll use your head for a target."
+
+With this threat the burglar staggered out of the thicket, and Sam began
+to speculate as to whether he should make one supreme effort to escape
+before his other captor awakened.
+
+A second glance at the weapon decided him in the negative, however, and
+he meekly stepped to the edge of the woods in order to obey the
+instructions given.
+
+Despite Jim's apparent intoxication he watched the boy closely, still
+holding the revolver ready for use, and after pushing the boat into the
+stream he cried:
+
+"Now go ahead, an' let me see him in about two minutes, or I'll fill you
+full of bullets."
+
+If Sam had been a brave boy he would have made a dash for liberty at
+this moment; but he was in nearly every sense of the word a coward, and
+obeyed the order literally.
+
+"Who's there?" Phil asked, angrily, as the boy shook him vigorously.
+
+"Jim told me to make you get up, or he'd shoot," Sam replied, meekly.
+
+"Make me get up? What time is it?"
+
+"I don't know; but it doesn't seem to be more than three o'clock."
+
+"Where's Jim?"
+
+"Jest startin' for the fair grounds, an' if you don't show yourself
+pretty soon he's sure to shoot me."
+
+"There wouldn't be any particular harm in that, for you deserve it; but
+it can't be possible the fool is goin' to show himself in daylight when
+more than one is lookin' for him."
+
+"That's what he said," and Sam, fearing lest the half-drunken burglar
+would begin his pistol practice, seated himself behind the largest tree
+that might protect him from the bullets.
+
+Now that Phil was awake, he did not lose any further time in talking,
+but ran out to where he could command a view of the creek, and once more
+Sam had an opportunity for escape which he did not dare to embrace.
+
+"Come back here, an' don't make a fool of yourself," Jim's partner
+cried, angrily, as he saw the man pulling leisurely from the bank.
+
+"What's crawlin' on you? Don't I know my business?"
+
+"Not if you count on goin' up there before dark."
+
+"That's jest what I intend to do, so don't screech so much."
+
+"Come back, I tell you, or it'll be all up for both of us!"
+
+"I've been in this business long enough to know it," was the reply, as
+Jim continued to row, increasing each instant the distance between
+himself and the shore.
+
+"Now, don't spoil a good thing," Phil said, pleadingly, and,
+understanding that this conversation might be continued for a short
+time, Sam plucked up sufficient courage to make an attack upon the
+provisions.
+
+He took from the general store a large piece of cheese, some crackers
+and as much meat as he believed would suffice to make a hearty meal,
+after which he hid the lot near the tree behind which he was hiding.
+
+Then he crept back to his former position, and listened to the
+conversation between his captors.
+
+Phil alternately coaxed and threatened his partner; but all to no
+purpose, as could be told by the tones of the latter's voice while he
+pulled up stream, and the baffled burglar returned to the camping place
+absolutely furious with rage.
+
+"This comes of my bein' so foolish as to bring that fool liquor," he
+said half to himself. "It's mighty lucky he didn't know I had more than
+one bottle."
+
+Then he took from one of his pockets a second flask, refreshing himself
+with a portion of the contents before asking:
+
+"What did he say to you?"
+
+"Nothin' except that he was goin' up to the fair," Sam replied, timidly.
+
+"But what made him tell you to waken me?"
+
+"I s'pose that was so I couldn't have a chance to run away."
+
+"What else did he say?"
+
+"That I was to tell him jest how you took his leavin'."
+
+"Well, if he's lucky enough to get back, tell him I said he was the
+biggest fool that ever walked on two legs. Them chums of your'n are sure
+to spot him, an' it's ten to one he's pinched before sunset."
+
+Sam did not understand what the man meant by the term "pinched," but
+under the circumstances he hardly thought it safe to inquire, and the
+angry burglar continued:
+
+"We'll make ready to get out of this if he isn't back by daylight, an'
+while there's nothin' else to do you'd better put that stuff under
+ground, for there's no knowin' now when we'll be able to take it away."
+
+The spade was near at hand ready for use, and while Phil alternately
+smoked and drank from the bottle, Sam set about burying the plunder.
+
+This man was quite as hard a taskmaster as the one who had just
+departed, and the boy was forced to work as he had probably never done
+before, until sufficient of an excavation had been made to conceal the
+goods.
+
+Under the direction of the burglar Sam covered the different packages
+with earth; did his best to hide all traces of his work, and when it was
+so dark that he could no longer see to move about was allowed to rest.
+
+During this time Phil had been drinking and smoking, with the result
+that he could hardly speak plainly when the task was accomplished, and
+so intoxicated did he appear to be that Sam thought it safe to eat the
+food he had concealed.
+
+"Keep on talkin' so's I'll know where you are, or on goes the ropes an'
+gag again," Phil cried, and the boy obeyed, repeating over and over the
+same words in order to satisfy his suspicious captor.
+
+After eating a hearty meal, Sam succeeded in mustering sufficient
+courage to admit of his thinking about attempting to escape.
+
+From the manner in which the burglar spoke he knew it could not be very
+much longer before the man would be so completely under the influence of
+liquor as to render him helpless, and he said to himself:
+
+"If I could get the rope around his hands an' legs I'd soon be out of
+this place."
+
+"What's that you are saying?" Phil cried, angrily.
+
+"Nothin'; I was only doin' as you told me, talkin' so's you'd know where
+I was."
+
+"I'll save all that trouble," and the man lurched to his feet as he
+picked up the rope.
+
+"Please don't tie me ag'in," Sam pleaded. "I won't try to git away."
+
+"I'll go bail that you don't after I'm through with you. Put out your
+hands."
+
+Phil was yet capable of mischief, even though his brain was clouded, and
+Sam did not dare to disobey.
+
+He suffered himself to be tied without making any remonstrance, and as
+the burglar staggered to his former resting place, the boy tested the
+bonds.
+
+Previously he had been lashed in such a manner that it was impossible to
+move hand or foot, but now he soon realized that he could do both, and
+the happy thought came that he might free himself with but little
+difficulty if a favorable opportunity for escape should present itself.
+
+"Now you're fixed," Phil said, half to himself, "an' I may as well take
+things comfortable till we're certain that that fool of a Jim is
+settled."
+
+"Are you goin' to leave here to-night?" Sam asked, more for the purpose
+of learning how far the man was on the road to intoxication than for
+information.
+
+"If he ain't here by twelve o'clock we'll know the jig is up, an' skip
+so's to be out of the way before any one can come sneakin' around for
+the stuff."
+
+"Then if Jim isn't back by that time, an' he keeps on drinkin', I'll
+take all the chances," Sam said to himself, and from that instant he
+strained every nerve to learn how nearly the burglar had succeeded in
+making a worse brute of himself than nature intended.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII.
+
+_A FAILURE._
+
+
+Tired though Teddy was, a long time elapsed after the conclusion of the
+fakirs' feast before he could close his eyes in slumber.
+
+Now that the excitement of the party had died away, the fact that he was
+a prisoner, suffered to remain outside the prison only because men of
+wealth were willing to guarantee he would respond to the call of the
+court, came into his mind even more vividly than at the time of the
+arrest, and despite all the words of cheer which had been spoken he
+really began to believe Uncle Nathan could show plausible proof of his
+guilt.
+
+Under almost any other circumstances he would have speculated upon what
+should be done with the large amount of money he had already earned, and
+rejoiced at the thought that he could supply his mother with what she
+might need for the present, at all events.
+
+The profits of the cane and knife boards were hardly thought of on this
+night while the one painful fact stood before him so prominently and
+menacingly.
+
+His companions had been asleep many hours before slumber visited his
+eyelids, and so heavy was his heart even while in dreamland that he
+awoke with the first dawn of day, and aroused the others to the last
+day's work they would be called upon to do at the Peach Bottom fair
+during the present season.
+
+"Why is it that you have turned out so early?" Mr. Sweet asked, in a
+sleepy tone, rising to his feet as the only effectual method of driving
+the drowsiness from his eyelids.
+
+"I sha'n't feel much like sleeping till I know how the case is coming
+out," Teddy replied, sadly.
+
+"There is no need to worry with such friends as you have got. Put it
+right out of your mind until business closes to-night, for there's a big
+pile of work to be done if you expect to make much money."
+
+"I wish I could," Teddy said, with a long-drawn sigh as he aroused Tim
+and Dan.
+
+Half an hour later the three boys were eating what it was believed would
+be their last meal in the very unsatisfactory boarding-house, and
+Teddy's place of business was the first opened on that morning.
+
+There were no more early visitors; but the fakirs who had been present
+at the feast on the evening previous gathered around, all appearing
+very eager to spend money, and trade was as lively as it had been on any
+other morning.
+
+The crowd bought rings and threw them recklessly until each man had
+spent considerably more than a dollar, when Teddy suddenly realized that
+this sudden passion for canes only arose from a desire to aid him. Then
+he said, decidedly:
+
+"There's no need of you fellows doin' this. I know you want to see me
+out of the scrape; but I've made a lot of money already, an' don't want
+to take yours."
+
+"You can't have too much, my boy," one of them said with a laugh, "and
+we want to see you go away with a pile. Trade has been boomin' for all
+hands, an' it would be kinder rough if we couldn't have a little fun now
+the fair is the same as over."
+
+This did not satisfy Teddy, and he continued to expostulate against the
+generosity; but all to no purpose. The fakirs played until a sufficient
+number of visitors had arrived to warrant their opening the other
+booths, and then Tim and Teddy were left alone, Dan having started for
+the exhibition building some time previous.
+
+Until ten o'clock there was no more than work enough to keep one boy
+moderately busy, and Teddy experienced a deep sense of relief as Mr.
+Harvey came up to the stand with a cheery "good morning."
+
+"I hear that your Uncle Nathan succeeded in carrying out his threat,"
+the visitor said, as if speaking about what was a very trifling matter.
+
+"Yes, sir; an' do you think he can send me to prison?"
+
+"Not a bit of it. You are under bail, and I venture to predict that he
+will not carry it to court, for he has sufficient sense to know it may
+prove a very expensive job. We sent our men to the barn on the marshes
+last night."
+
+"What did you find?" Teddy asked, eagerly.
+
+"More than I expected. There were no goods in the building, but some
+have evidently been buried there, and this fact, together with the
+evidence that boats have been drawn up on the shore recently, proves
+your story as to what was seen when you boys followed the two men to be
+correct."
+
+"The other fellow has run away, I suppose."
+
+"I think he is yet in the immediate vicinity, otherwise Jim would be
+willing to talk."
+
+"Have you seen him since he was arrested?"
+
+"I have just come from the jail. I told him of the evidence we already
+had to connect him with the burglary, and that we should push him hard
+in the interest of you and Hazelton. He understands that there is an
+opportunity to turn State's witness, but he absolutely refuses to speak
+on any subject. Therefore I fancy his partner has not yet got away."
+
+"Then there has been no good done in arresting him," Teddy said,
+mournfully.
+
+"That is where you are making a mistake. I have prepared an affidavit
+for you and Dan to swear to, and shall endeavor to have a warrant issued
+at once charging him with burglary, so he can't give us the slip in case
+he gets clear in the matter of swindling."
+
+"Do you want Dan an' I now?"
+
+"Yes; go after him. I will only keep you ten or fifteen minutes."
+
+Teddy turned to go toward the exhibition buildings, but halted an
+instant to ask:
+
+"Have you seen my uncle this morning?"
+
+"No, but I shall do so later in the day, and after we have a little
+conversation I do not think he will be so eager to see you in prison."
+
+The lawyer's confident manner had very much to do with taking the load
+of sorrow from Teddy's mind, and he looked almost cheerful as he asked
+of the manager of the Stevens exhibit that Dan be allowed to accompany
+him, explaining the reason for making the request.
+
+"Of course he can go," the gentleman replied, readily. "Trade won't be
+so good to-day but that he can be spared as well as not, and even if it
+was rushing, he should have permission to leave."
+
+When the boys were at the cane-board once more Mr. Harvey hurried them
+away to the magistrate's office, and there a long document was read,
+which described in detail all they had seen on the day when Sam first
+gave an exhibition of his skill as a detective.
+
+They marveled not a little that the lawyer should have remembered so
+well every trifling incident. Nothing, however apparently unimportant,
+had escaped him, and, as Dan said:
+
+"It is written down better than if he had really been with us."
+
+This document was sworn to and signed by both, after which Mr. Harvey
+told them that they might return to work, adding as he turned to Teddy:
+
+"The man who has been arrested on your complaint will have a hearing
+to-morrow, and it is absolutely necessary you should be at this office
+as early as nine o'clock. I don't know whether Dan will be allowed to
+tell what he has heard Sam say regarding the matter, but he had better
+come with you."
+
+"I'll be on hand," the young fakir replied. "Do you know when I'm to be
+tried?"
+
+"That case won't come up for some time in view of the evidence your
+lawyer is collecting," the 'Squire said.
+
+"Don't worry about it, for I think the real burglars will soon be
+caught."
+
+"An' does Mr. Hazelton have to stay in jail all the time?"
+
+"There is no other way out of it, since he hasn't got friends who can go
+bail for him."
+
+Teddy wanted very much to ask permission to see the prisoner, but
+inasmuch as he was accused of being equally guilty with the fakir it
+hardly seemed just the proper thing to make the request, and he left the
+office, followed by Dan, who said, as they gained the open air:
+
+"You ain't goin' to have half so much trouble as you think, Teddy.
+Anybody can see that even the 'Squire is on your side, although he did
+issue the warrant, an' the proof must be mighty strong to make any of
+'em believe you did anything against the old miser. But this keeps us
+here on the grounds another day, doesn't it?"
+
+"Yes, an' if Mr. Sweet packs up his tent to-night, we'll have to hunt
+for a place to sleep in the village."
+
+"That don't worry me very much. I've made a good week's work out of the
+fair, an' can afford to spend a little money."
+
+"I shall pay all the bills, of course," Teddy replied, quickly. "It
+wouldn't be any more'n right because you are goin' to stay to help me."
+
+Dan was quite positive he would pay his own bills, and his companion
+equally certain he should not; but there was little chance for
+discussion, since they had arrived opposite the grand stand by this
+time, and were hailed by Deacon Jones, who looked as if he considered
+himself the one important personage on the grounds as he said:
+
+"I want both of you boys to be here at exactly two o'clock. Don't fail
+to come, no matter how much business you may have on hand."
+
+"What's the matter?" Teddy asked, immediately thinking some new trouble
+threatened him.
+
+"There will be plenty of time for explanation after you get here," was
+the mysterious reply, and then the deacon signified that the interview
+was at an end by turning to speak with some gentlemen who had been
+watching the boys closely.
+
+"What do you suppose is up now?" Teddy asked with a sigh, and Dan
+replied, mournfully:
+
+"I'm sure I don't know," but in his own mind he was convinced that the
+deacon intended to surrender the boy whose surety he had appeared
+willing to become on the evening previous.
+
+Teddy was so disturbed by dismal forebodings that Dan was very careful
+to hide his suspicions, since it could do only harm to discuss them, and
+the two parted, feeling as if Uncle Nathan had outwitted Mr. Harvey.
+
+On retuning to his place of business Teddy did not have the heart to
+wait upon the customers, and after telling Tim what had been said to
+him, he added:
+
+"I can't work; it's no use to try. There must have been something new
+come up, an' I won't be able to show that I'm innocent of robbing the
+store."
+
+Dan could give him no consolation, for he also felt that matters were
+approaching a dangerous crisis, and he simply said:
+
+"Loaf around, old fellow, an' I'll look out for the work here. Try to
+put it out of your mind, for things won't be made better by worryin'
+over 'em."
+
+Just at this moment Teddy's mother arrived. She had heard all the
+particulars concerning the arrest and subsequent release, therefore
+began at once to sympathize with her son.
+
+"Then you know what the deacon is goin' to do?" Teddy asked.
+
+This was something of which Mrs. Hargreaves was ignorant, but upon being
+told, appeared even more distressed than her son, thus increasing
+instead of lightening his troubles.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX.
+
+_THE TESTIMONIAL._
+
+
+It was impossible for Teddy to follow Tim's advice to "loaf around."
+
+His heart was so full of sorrow that his greatest desire was to go where
+those who might believe he had been a partner of the burglars could not
+see him; but since that was impossible, if he intended to obey the
+deacon's injunctions and present himself at the grand stand at the
+specified time, the next best thing was to remain behind the booth where
+his mother tried her best to cheer him.
+
+"It can't be possible that anything to your disadvantage has occurred,
+Teddy," she said as she held his hand for mutual sympathy. "Mr. Reaves
+would have sent me word at once if that had happened."
+
+"Perhaps he doesn't know about it. Uncle Nathan may have been talking
+with the deacon again, an' turned him against me."
+
+"I don't believe it would be possible for him to do such a thing. His
+reputation is not so good that people could put faith in all he says,
+more especially in regard to this case."
+
+"Then if he didn't do it some one else has, an' that makes it all the
+worse," Teddy replied, as he tried to force back the tears.
+
+At this moment the sorrowing ones were startled by hearing the voice of
+the man whom they had every reason to call their enemy, and an instant
+later Uncle Nathan stood before them.
+
+"Well," he said in what sounded more like a snarl than anything else,
+"you see the old skinflint did jest what he promised, an' he'll see to
+it that the deacon don't stay on your bail very long unless I get my
+rights."
+
+"What do you mean by your rights?" Mrs. Hargreaves asked.
+
+"I lent this ungrateful boy the money to start him in a business where
+he's made more in a week than I ever could in a year. Then he helped
+people to rob me, an' after all that I made what any man must call a
+fair offer. See how much I've lost by him, an' then think of my offerin'
+to straighten everything out by goin' in as his partner."
+
+"Why didn't you do this before the fair opened?"
+
+"I couldn't tell how it would turn out," the old man began, and then
+realizing that he was admitting something to his discredit, he added,
+quickly, "I mean I hadn't lost my money then, an' never suspected how he
+would wrong me."
+
+It seemed as if these last words drove Teddy to desperation, and he no
+longer-remembered the respect due to age.
+
+"Look here," he cried, angrily, rising, and standing directly in front
+of Uncle Nathan, "if you believe I'm a burglar, you can't want to be my
+partner. It was only after the fact of my having made considerable money
+was known that you offered any trade. If the venture had been a losing
+one you are the last person who would have taken hold of it. Now I'm
+under arrest on a charge made by you, who know I am innocent, an' we'll
+put an end to all this talk. Don't come where my mother and I am; do the
+very worst you can, an' some day I'll have my innings."
+
+"You threaten, eh?"
+
+"That's exactly what I'm doing. I have leased this piece of ground until
+to-morrow, and warn you that it'll be mighty uncomfortable if you show
+your nose here again. Go now an' go quick!"
+
+"That's right, Teddy," Tim shouted in a tone of delight from the
+opposite side of the booth. "Give it to him hot, an' I'll do my share.
+If you don't want to tackle the job till after the trial, say the word
+an' I'll sail in, for it gives me a pain to see him around."
+
+Teddy made no reply to this generous offer; but Uncle Nathan stepped
+back very quickly as if fearing an immediate attack.
+
+"You won't be so bold to-morrow," he snarled, shaking his fist in
+impotent rage, and then he disappeared from view amid the crowd that had
+begun to gather.
+
+Both Teddy and his clerk thought it very singular that business should
+be so good on this day, when the majority of the other fakirs were
+comparatively idle, and also in view of what had been said against the
+proprietor of the cane-board.
+
+Yet the people gathered around by scores, all intent on patronizing the
+boys, and at the same time embracing every opportunity to display their
+good will.
+
+Teddy and his mother remained partially screened from the gaze of the
+curious until nearly two o'clock, when Dan, looking decidedly troubled,
+arrived.
+
+"I suppose we've got to go to the grand stand an' find out what the
+deacon wants," he said, mournfully. "My boss told me that we must be
+there on time, an' we might as well start."
+
+"I want to have it over as soon as possible," Teddy replied. "Nothin'
+that comes can be any worse than waitin' here thinkin' of what may
+happen."
+
+The two boys walked either side of Mrs. Hargreaves as they went to meet
+the deacon, and it seemed very much as if the majority of the people
+present knew what was about to occur, for the sad-visaged party was
+followed by crowds of the visitors as they walked steadily onward.
+
+It was exactly two o'clock when they arrived at the stairway leading to
+the grand stand, and there they were met by the leader of the band from
+the Run, who said with a mysterious manner as he opened a gate leading
+to the track in front of the judges' stand:
+
+"You are to come this way."
+
+"Where's the deacon?" Teddy asked.
+
+"Waiting for you."
+
+Without further explanation the musician led the three to a spot where
+all could see them, and to the intense surprise of the sorrowful-looking
+party, the throng assembled on the benches greeted them with the most
+hearty applause.
+
+"You are to come with me, Mrs. Hargreaves," the conductor said, as he
+escorted her to one of the front seats, and Teddy and Dan stood as if
+stupefied, gazing in dismay at the sea of faces in front of them.
+
+Before the boys had sufficiently recovered from their bewilderment to be
+able to speculate upon what was to happen Deacon Jones came down the
+steps until he reached a place where all could see him and there began a
+speech which caused at least two of that assemblage to gaze at him in
+open-mouthed astonishment.
+
+The manager of the fair did not intend to neglect any opportunity of
+making himself conspicuous, and he delivered an eloquent address,
+looking first at the boys and then at the audience, which cannot be
+given here because of lack of space.
+
+He first explained to the spectators that Teddy had taken upon himself
+the business of fakir simply that he might aid his widowed mother. Then
+he detailed the loss of the fifteen dollars, and finally broached the
+one important matter, that of the scene on the creek, when the three
+women were rescued from drowning.
+
+By this time the cheeks of Teddy and Dan were flaming red, and if he had
+been charging them with the most atrocious crimes they could not have
+looked more guilty or uncomfortable.
+
+"As you all know," he said, in conclusion, "we have met here to see
+bravery and a spirit of self-sacrifice rewarded. On behalf of the ladies
+whose lives were saved by these little heroes I am about to present
+Edward Hargreaves and Daniel Summers with one hundred dollars each. In
+addition to that amount the managers of the fair and several gentlemen
+who do not care to have their names made public, have made up a purse of
+one hundred and eighty dollars to be divided equally between them. It is
+most gratifying to me that I have been selected as the instrument
+through whom this testimonial is presented, and in behalf of my brother
+officers as well as myself I will state that these brave boys have the
+freedom of the grounds whenever the Peach Bottom fair is open."
+
+As he concluded, the deacon walked with a majestic bearing down to the
+bewildered boys, presented each with a well-filled pocketbook and then
+waved his hand as a signal for the band, every member of which did his
+best to make the music heard above the rounds of applause intended for
+the blushing fakirs.
+
+In the meantime the people came down from the benches to congratulate
+the life-savers, and for fully an hour the two were forced to remain
+there listening to words of praise which they felt were not warranted by
+their exploit on the creek.
+
+Among the most welcome of these enthusiastic visitors was Jacob Sweet,
+and he said, heartily:
+
+"I heard of this little performance jest in time to get here before that
+long-winded speech was begun; but what pleases me the most is that I was
+ahead of the whole gang, an' started our little blow-out when it wasn't
+known you had so many friends. I'll see you to-night, of course, an' I
+must go now, for the bouncer has been around tellin' that you've been
+sleepin' in my tent, an' I count on a good payin' crowd this afternoon."
+
+It was considerably past three o'clock when the boys and Mrs. Hargreaves
+returned to the cane-board, looking very much different than when they
+left it, and Tim cried as they came up:
+
+"I've heard all about it, an' what I want to know is, where was old
+Nathan while that speechifyin' was goin' on?"
+
+"I saw him when we first arrived," Mrs. Hargreaves replied, "but he left
+a few moments later, although I have no doubt that he remained where he
+could hear all that was said without being seen."
+
+"That's where he was wise. It wouldn't be very pleasant for him to show
+himself now, 'cause everybody is down on him after what the deacon
+said."
+
+Dan was obliged to return to his duties, and he whispered to Teddy
+before leaving:
+
+"I tell you what it is, old feller, this has been a reg'lar puddin' for
+us, an' I'd give a good deal to see another jest like it."
+
+"You're all right, but I expect after this Uncle Nathan will be so mad
+he'll make me a pile of trouble."
+
+"Don't worry about that; his claws are cut now. I'll be back in time to
+go to supper."
+
+When he departed Teddy had an opportunity to say a few words to his
+mother before she returned home on the stage, which was advertised to
+leave at four o'clock, and while he did this all thought of being under
+arrest was put far from his mind because of the joy at what he was now
+able to perform.
+
+"Never mind what happens to me," he whispered. "I've now got nearly
+money enough to pay off all we owe, an' it has been earned honestly,
+too, although I believe they paid a big price for what Dan an' I did on
+the creek."
+
+"I'm thinking more of the praise you earned than the money, Teddy. It
+was very sweet to hear the deacon say so much to you before all those
+people."
+
+"Then both of us will be awfully jolly to-night, an' to-morrow I'll be
+home, an' bring Dan with me."
+
+"Invite him to stay just as long as he wishes, and I will have a nice
+supper ready when the last stage arrives."
+
+Teddy gave his mother nearly all the money he had, including the
+"testimonial," and as she walked away he said to Tim:
+
+"I'm willin' to be arrested, an' put into jail a good many days for the
+sake of being able to help her as I can do now."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXX.
+
+_THE TRIAL._
+
+
+It was only natural that both Teddy and Dan should feel highly elated
+after this public expression of admiration which culminated in the
+presentation of the purse, but they immediately returned to attend to
+their several duties when the ceremonies were finished.
+
+Dan went back to the exhibition as if he had done nothing worth
+remembering, and in less than half an hour from the time the deacon
+concluded his flowery speech it would have required a very ardent
+student of humanity to discover that anything out of the natural course
+of events had taken place.
+
+At the cane-board Teddy waited upon his customers as before, and without
+the slightest sign of having been honored by the magnates of the fair,
+while Dan fired at the target as if he had been a boy with no other
+claim upon the public's attention than his ability to hit a mark.
+
+Yet it must be confessed that both experienced a very pleasing sense of
+having satisfied the public, and each, in his own peculiar way, knew he
+had risen a little above the average boy.
+
+There can be no question that any one placed in the same position must
+have felt gratified by the many expressions of friendship and good-will
+with which these two were literally overwhelmed, and it would have been
+more than could be expected of human nature had they remained unmoved
+under the extravagant flattery which was showered upon them immediately
+after the close of Deacon Jones' speech.
+
+Although there was not quite as much money flowing into the box as on
+the day previous, Teddy was more than pleased with the receipts, because
+every penny seemed to express just such an amount of good-will.
+
+Until nearly nightfall he remained at the booth, answering questions
+upon the same subject till it seemed to have been worn threadbare, and
+then, however great his desire to earn money, he felt a positive sense
+of relief that his connection with the Peach Bottom fair had finally
+come to an end.
+
+"This is the last time you an' I will pack up the stuff," he said to Tim
+as they put into condition for removal the cane and knife boards. "I
+promised to give you all that was left, and you're more than welcome to
+it."
+
+"But you surely don't mean to give me the whole lot," Tim cried in
+surprise.
+
+"That's exactly what I'm going to do, and I sincerely hope when you make
+a stand you'll meet with the same good friends I have here."
+
+"I can't take these things unless you'll allow me to pay something
+toward what they cost."
+
+"Look here, Tim," Teddy said, earnestly, "you have shown yourself to be
+a friend of mine, an' every cent that has come in here you've accounted
+for. Now, whatever may happen, I'm through bein' a fakir; but if you
+want to follow the business, I can only hope you'll come out all right.
+We'll carry this to Mr. Sweet's tent, an' I'll only be so much the
+better pleased, and in case you don't, I'm bound to help you in every
+way. Besides, I promised to pay a certain percentage on the profits;
+that is yet to be settled."
+
+"It never will be," Tim replied in the most decided tone. "If I take
+these goods I've got more than a fair share, an' won't listen to
+anything else."
+
+"Very well, we'll leave it that way. You now own everything, an' I owe
+you lots of good-will."
+
+On this basis the remnants of the two boards were packed up for removal,
+and when they were about to take the goods to Mr. Sweet's tent Dan
+arrived.
+
+"How much business did you do to-day?" he asked.
+
+Teddy delayed sufficiently long to count the receipts, and then
+replied:
+
+"Forty-one dollars and fifteen cents. That gives Tim four-eleven, an' I
+get more than would have been the case but for the testimonial this
+afternoon. The folks crowded around to see me, rather than to get the
+canes, an' so business has picked up better than any one expected."
+
+"It don't make any difference how the money came in so long as you have
+got it," Dan replied, philosophically, "an' now the question is what are
+we to do for supper, since we paid our bill at the boarding-house this
+afternoon?"
+
+"Have you got any idea?"
+
+"Of course, or else I wouldn't have asked the question. Let's invite Mr.
+Sweet, the bouncer, and the clown to some restaurant down town, an' try
+to give them as good a time as we had last night."
+
+This proposition met with Teddy's approval, and the party was made up as
+he suggested, the cost being divided between the two boys who had been
+the recipients of the public testimonial.
+
+Not until a late hour in the evening did these festivities come to an
+end, and then the party retired to the museum tent, where they remained
+undisturbed until the present season of the Peach Bottom fair had come
+to an end.
+
+It was an unusually late hour for fakirs to arise when Mr. Sweet
+awakened the boys as he said:
+
+"Turn out now, lads, an' get your stuff ready for removal. I'm sorry to
+part company, but we can't stay here forever, an' the museum must be
+forty miles the other side of Waterville by Monday morning."
+
+Dan had completed and been paid for his work with the Stevens Company,
+therefore he had nothing to do; Teddy no longer claimed any interest in
+the canes and knives left over from the week's work; consequently he was
+free to go where he pleased, and Tim had his goods in such a condition
+that they could be removed at any moment, which prevented him from
+feeling any anxiety regarding the future.
+
+Thus it was that all three of the boys were at liberty to assist the
+proprietor of the museum, and this they did with a will until the
+arrival of Lawyer Harvey caused them to think of what had almost been
+forgotten in the bustle and confusion of breaking camp.
+
+"We are due at the 'Squire's office at nine o'clock, and it is time you
+boys were getting over that way," he said, briskly; "our case won't come
+up to-day, but it has been decided to give Hazelton a hearing, and I am
+very much afraid he's going to get the worst of it."
+
+"What do you mean?" Teddy asked, anxiously.
+
+"Well, you see I have not been able to get any information in addition
+to what you boys furnished, and there seems little doubt that the
+'Squire must perforce bind him over for trial. The fact that he has
+deliberately swindled so many people will work against him, and we can
+do very little to save him."
+
+"What will be the result of his being bound over?" Teddy asked.
+
+"He must remain in jail, unless he can get bail, until next fall."
+
+"But that in itself will be a terrible punishment."
+
+"True; yet it cannot be avoided. If he had worked honestly the case
+would be different; but now he will be fortunate even to get out in the
+fall."
+
+"Yet Uncle Nathan says I am equally guilty."
+
+"We can easily show you had nothing to do with the robbery, and that is
+our only care this morning."
+
+"What about Long Jim?"
+
+"He remains silent, refusing to answer the simplest questions, and
+unless he speaks Hazelton must be bound over; the 'Squire can pursue no
+other course."
+
+Believing as they did that Hazelton was innocent of the charge upon
+which he had been arrested, both Teddy and Dan felt it was a great
+hardship for the fakir to remain so long in prison; but since it was
+beyond their power to give him any relief, neither expressed an opinion
+other than has been recorded.
+
+Mr. Harvey had come for them to accompany him to the Squire's office,
+and since there was nothing to detain them they set out, after first
+bidding Mr. Sweet a cordial 'goodby, for he had announced his intention
+of leaving Peach Bottom on the noon train.
+
+"I shall see one or both of you at some time in the future," he said,
+with considerable feeling, "an' there'll be no complaint to make if I
+never fall in with worse boys."
+
+The bouncer and the clown also had something to say in the form of an
+adieu, and when the boys left the proprietor of the alleged wonderful
+museum it was like parting with an old friend, for he had shown himself
+to be a "very present help in time of trouble."
+
+Tim did not propose to start for the Run until his companions had
+concluded their business; his goods were packed ready for removal, and
+there was nothing better for him to do than accompany them to the
+court-room where it seemed as if all they might say would result only in
+a long term of imprisonment for Hazelton before he could be tried on the
+baseless charge brought against him, simply because of the disreputable
+business in which he was engaged.
+
+Mr. Harvey had little or nothing to say during the walk to the 'Squire's
+office, and arriving there the jewelry fakir was seen looking thoroughly
+despondent.
+
+"Can I speak with him?" Teddy asked the lawyer. "What do you want to
+say?"
+
+"Nothing in particular, except to tell him how bad I feel because we
+could do nothing to clear him."
+
+"Very well; but do not talk long, for it may prejudice your own case.
+The people whom he has swindled are here to see that some form of
+punishment is meted out to him, and it can do you no good to be seen
+acting as a consoler."
+
+This possibility troubled Teddy very little since he was confident of
+his own innocence, and he approached the prisoner as he said:
+
+"I wish I could do something, Mr. Hazelton, to prove you as innocent as
+I believe you to be."
+
+"There's no need of that, my boy. I've put you in a hole already, and
+you've done more for me than some others who call themselves friends."
+
+"I know it was Long Jim who committed the burglary; but how can it be
+proven now?"
+
+"There was only one way, and that was to catch the real thieves with
+their plunder. Mr. Harvey tells me his attempt was a failure, an' it
+wouldn't surprise me if I was not only remanded for trial, but received
+a sentence for something of which I am absolutely innocent. I don't
+profess to be very good, my boy, as you may understand after seeing me
+work on the fair grounds; but I never yet descended to do such things as
+I am charged with now."
+
+"I am certain of that," and Teddy pressed the prisoner's hand in token
+of friendship, "and only wish it was possible to aid you."
+
+"You have already done more than my partners did," was the grateful
+reply, and then further conversation was prevented as the 'Squire called
+the assembly to order.
+
+It was not a regular court of law; but one would have thought it the
+most dignified judicial body in the country had he seen the air with
+which the 'Squire took his seat at the head of the long table as he
+called the case.
+
+"That settles Hazelton," Dan whispered as Teddy left the prisoner and
+rejoined his friends. "Somebody has got to suffer in order to make the
+law come out square, an' he's the feller what'll have to stand the brunt
+of everything."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXI.
+
+_AN ARRIVAL._
+
+
+Lawyer Harvey did not neglect anything which might work to the advantage
+of his client; but in the face of the evidence his efforts appeared to
+be in vain.
+
+Uncle Nathan, who arrived just as the case was called, swore to the fact
+that Hazelton had been in his store on the Sunday afternoon prior to the
+robbery, and that he had told the prisoner of his keeping large amounts
+of money in the building, because of the difficulty and expense of
+sending the cash to the Waterville bank.
+
+He also testified that Hazelton seemed unusually interested in
+everything pertaining to the store, and asked many questions relative to
+his (the witness') habits, such as the time when business usually began,
+how late he remained in the building at night, as well as several other
+things which now seemed as if the information had been sought simply for
+the purpose of knowing when would be the safest time to commit the
+crime.
+
+"How much did you lose?" Mr. Harvey asked.
+
+"I don't know for certain; but I stand willin' to give fifty dollars if
+the goods can be recovered, an' if my nephew would tell all he
+knows----"
+
+"That will do, Mr. Hargreaves," the lawyer said, sharply. "Teddy is not
+under examination, and until he is we do not care to hear your opinion
+concerning him."
+
+"I reckon I can tell what I want to, can't I, 'Squire?"
+
+"You must confine yourself to this particular case. As to whether there
+is sufficient evidence to bind the prisoner over does not concern the
+charge against your nephew, at least not to the extent of your telling
+what you think."
+
+"I thought, perhaps, if he heard me say I'd give fifty dollars to know
+where the goods were, an' knew I'd swear to it, he might confess, for he
+has shown himself to be powerful fond of a dollar."
+
+"That appears to be a peculiarity of some of his relatives," Mr. Harvey
+said, dryly, and at this remark the spectators laughed heartily, while
+the old man growled:
+
+"I didn't come here to be told that I was a miser; but it seems even men
+who call themselves gentlemen think sich things are all right."
+
+"If you have no other evidence to give we will not detain you," the
+lawyer said, sharply; and as Uncle Nathan returned to his chair near the
+door the proprietor of the hotel at the Run was called upon to testify.
+
+What he said was in favor of the prisoner rather than otherwise.
+
+He swore to the fact that the prisoner spent the night on which the
+burglary was committed at his house; that he pretended to retire at an
+early hour, and started for Peach Bottom on the first stage.
+
+Under Mr. Harvey's skillful cross-examination the landlord admitted that
+unless a man got out of the window he could not have left the house
+without the knowledge of the watchman, who kept the keys and remained in
+the office all night. It was also shown that Hazelton brought and
+carried away with him, so far as was known at the hotel, nothing but a
+small traveling satchel.
+
+Then several people from the Run were called to prove that the fakir was
+really in the town on this particular Sunday, and the driver of the
+stage testified that the prisoner rode with him the entire distance to
+Peach Bottom. The landlord of the hotel where Hazelton boarded during
+the fair week, or so much of it as he was at liberty, swore to the fact
+that the prisoner had never brought any quantity of baggage to his
+house, and appeared to be very regular in his habits. So far as he (the
+landlord) knew, the fakir remained in his room nearly all the time,
+except while on the exhibition grounds.
+
+This ended the testimony, and Mr. Harvey argued that there was really
+no evidence to connect the prisoner with the crime.
+
+"That he conducted a game which could hardly be called honest is
+admitted," he said; "but it has nothing to do with the case. Prejudice
+should not be allowed to take the place of facts, and I insist that my
+client be released."
+
+"I reckon there's sufficient ground for suspicion," the 'Squire replied,
+"an' I don't see any other way out of it. A jury must decide, an' I
+shall hold him in the sum of three thousand----"
+
+At this moment the dignity of the court received a severe shock, as a
+most unseemly disturbance suddenly occurred at the door, and the 'Squire
+paused to learn who was so bold as to disturb the representative of the
+law at the very instant when he was delivering an opinion.
+
+"It's nobody but a boy," Uncle Nathan replied as he held the door firmly
+closed, while the would-be visitor kicked so vigorously as to threaten
+the destruction of the panels.
+
+"Bring him in here, an' we'll see whether such a row can be kicked up in
+a court of law with impunity."
+
+"Better let me throw him into the street," Uncle Nathan snarled.
+
+"Mr. Constable, bring that boy before me," the 'Squire said, sternly,
+and an instant later, to the consternation of all those who had seen
+him, the boy who was supposed to have been drowned two days before
+entered, looking decidedly the worse for having existed so long without
+water and soap.
+
+"Why, it's Sam, an' he ain't dead!" Teddy cried as he rose to his feet.
+
+"Of course I ain't; but it wouldn't been many days before I turned into
+a corpse if I hadn't got away from them thieves," the amateur detective
+replied.
+
+"Who are you, an' what do you want here?" the 'Squire asked, sternly, as
+he rapped on the table for the spectators to remain silent.
+
+"Why, I'm Sam Balderston, the feller who come to the fair to work for
+the Davis Boat an' Oar Company of Detroit, an' if what Long Jim told me
+was true, folks have been tryin' to find me in the creek."
+
+"This is the boy who was reported to have been drowned on the day when
+those lads," here the lawyer pointed to Teddy and Dan, "claim to have
+seen two men carrying goods into an old barn on the marshes. I fancy he
+can give us information relative to the true burglars."
+
+"You bet I can," and now that he was the central figure in the scene,
+all Sam's old assurance returned. "If you mean the fellers what broke
+into Teddy's uncle's store, I can flash one of them up. The other come
+to the fair an' didn't get back, so Phil thought he was arrested."
+
+"Who do you mean by the other fellow?" Mr. Harvey asked.
+
+"Why, Long Jim, the same man what swindled Teddy out of his fifteen
+dollars at Waterville."
+
+"Have you been with him since your disappearance?"
+
+"Most of the time he hung around, an' then ag'in Phil was there."
+
+"Who is Phil?"
+
+"Long Jim's partner. They've got a slat of stuff what has been stole
+'round here, an' I know where all of it is."
+
+"Tell the 'Squire the whole story."
+
+This was Sam's opportunity, and, in order to cover himself with glory,
+he slaughtered the truth in the most shocking manner.
+
+"Well," he said, in a consequential way, "when Dan an' me an' Teddy saw
+the thieves carryin' stuff down to that old barn I wanted to rush in an'
+arrest both; but the other fellows was scared an' come ashore to talk
+with Hazelton so's he'd tell 'em what to do. Then I jes' made up my mind
+to carry on the job myself, an' went back."
+
+"Where?" the 'Squire asked.
+
+"To the barn to get the stuff. While I was diggin' it up the men come
+back, an' the minute they saw who was on their trail they got
+frightened."
+
+"And who was on their trail?" the 'Squire interrupted.
+
+"Why, me, of course. They rushed in, an' I had the awfullest row; but it
+was two to one, an' so I got the worst of it. They had to work mighty
+hard before gettin' me tired, an' then all the stuff was dug up an' put
+in the boat. My craft was upset an' sent adrift, so's to make it look as
+if I was dead, an' we went down the creek six or seven miles, where we
+hid in the woods. Phil came back here after more goods what had been
+stolen, an' they was goin' to skip the country, when there was a big
+row, an' Long Jim allowed he'd come to the fair once more. Phil was mad,
+an' got pretty drunk, an' after that I had my innings. I turned to an'
+lashed him up same's I'd been; but we had an' awful fight. It takes
+more'n one man to git away with me."
+
+"Where is this fellow now?" the 'Squire interrupted again.
+
+"Down the creek, tied up so's he can't hardly breathe, an' he must be
+pretty near sober by this time."
+
+"If he was very drunk I do not understand how he could have fought so
+hard."
+
+"Well, he did; but I got the best of him, an' what's more, I know where
+all the stuff that's been stolen is hid."
+
+"Mr. Constable, bring into court the prisoner who is charged with
+swindling, and let us see if this extraordinary boy can identify him,"
+the 'Squire said, with an unusual amount of dignity.
+
+"If it's Long Jim, you bet I can," Sam said, as he turned toward the
+spectators that they might have a good opportunity of seeing such a
+wonderful detective as he claimed to be.
+
+Teddy and Dan could hardly control their impatience to speak privately
+with Sam. As a matter of course, they understood that he was
+embellishing the story, and both were eager to make him tell the exact
+truth.
+
+Just at that moment, however, Sam had no time to spend on ordinary boys.
+He had come out of a bad scrape with apparently flying colors, and
+intended to enjoy his triumph to the utmost before sinking back to his
+rightful plane.
+
+The jail was near at hand, and Sam had not exhibited himself as much as
+he desired when Long Jim was brought in.
+
+On seeing the boy the burglar gave a start of surprise, and allowed the
+incriminating question to escape his lips:
+
+"Has Phil been pinched, too?"
+
+"I took care of that business, an' we'll bring him in some time to-day.
+Say, what about that awful lickin' you was goin' to give me?"
+
+"I'll cut your throat before this job is finished," was the angry reply,
+and there was no longer any necessity of asking Sam if he recognized the
+prisoner.
+
+"You say you can show us the stolen goods, and the other burglar is
+where the officers can get him?" Mr. Harvey asked.
+
+"That's just what I can do," Sam replied, proudly.
+
+"Then you will have earned fifty dollars, for Mr. Hargreaves has
+promised, even sworn, that he will pay that amount for the return of his
+property," Mr. Harvey continued.
+
+"He might as well give me the money now, for I'm ready to turn the stuff
+up, an' when there's more big detective work to be done, come to me."
+
+"I don't know about payin' any reward till I'm certain the little
+villain isn't one of the thieves himself, an' is doin' this to swindle
+me," Uncle Nathan cried, quickly.
+
+"He shall have the reward if the story is true," the 'Squire replied.
+"You can't go back on what you've sworn to, an' must pay up. Mr.
+Constable, get two or three men an' go with this boy. Don't lose sight
+of him for a minute until he has given all the information in his
+power."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXII.
+
+_IN CONCLUSION._
+
+
+Sam was led away before either Teddy or Dan could speak privately with
+him; but they went at once to congratulate Hazelton on his apparently
+happy escape, and, in response to Mr. Harvey's request, the 'Squire
+said:
+
+"The prisoner can remain here, or in your custody, until the party
+returns. If the boy has told the truth there is nothing for me to do but
+discharge him, and I am really glad that he has come out so
+fortunately."
+
+"Don't think I'll ever forget what you've done for me," Hazelton
+whispered to Teddy.
+
+"But it isn't me at all. Sam seems to have fixed everything."
+
+"I've got an idea that I know pretty near the truth of the whole story,
+never mind how he tells it. At all events, we've no reason to complain,
+for if the goods and the other burglar are found, we are out of our
+trouble. Your uncle's charges can't hold after that."
+
+It was, as Teddy now realized for the first time, a happy conclusion to
+the troubles of both, and his heart was lighter than it had been at any
+time since the accusation was made.
+
+There was no question that those who had gone with Sam would be absent
+several hours, and the little party in the court-room had more time at
+their disposal than could well be occupied by the discussion of their
+affairs.
+
+After the different phases of the case had been gone over in detail,
+Hazelton asked Teddy:
+
+"How did you come out at the fair?"
+
+"I haven't figured up; but I know I've made a good deal, an' it must be
+almost enough, countin' the money Deacon Jones gave us, to pay the debt
+on the place."
+
+Until this moment Teddy had had so much on his mind that the principal
+cause of his turning fakir was absent from his mind; but now, with
+nothing better to do, he began to count up the week's work, announcing
+the result a few moments later by saying:
+
+"I took in two hundred an' fifty-two dollars an' fifty cents during the
+week. Out of that must come the money I lost at Waterville, what I paid
+Uncle Nathan, the privilege, the money I paid Mr. Reaves for the stock,
+Tim's wages, an' my board. That leaves one hundred an' forty-five
+dollars an' ninety-eight cents. With what came in from the testimonial
+I'll have enough to pay off the debt on the house, an' pretty near
+eight dollars for myself, which is what I call a big week's work."
+
+"I'm glad you have made it," Hazelton replied, heartily. "There is a
+little matter between you an' I which yet remains to be settled, and
+when that has been done you should be considerably better off."
+
+"I don't want you to do a thing," Teddy said, quickly. "So many people
+have helped me since the fair opened that it seems as if I was nothing
+more or less than a beggar."
+
+"You come very far from deserving that title," the fakir replied, and
+then the entrance of Mr. Reaves interrupted the conversation. After
+talking with the lawyer, the merchant said to Teddy:
+
+"I am more than pleased to learn that you will be freed from all your
+troubles in a short time. Next week I shall be in need of a clerk, and
+if you wish to take the situation it shall be left open until you are
+ready to go to work. The wages are six dollars a week for the first
+year, with an increase as soon as you can earn it, and I will really be
+pleased to have you in my employ."
+
+"I'd like to come," Teddy replied; "but it don't seem just right to
+leave mother."
+
+"There is no necessity of doing so. You can ride back and forth on the
+stage, unless your mother should decide, as I think she will eventually,
+to make her home in Waterville."
+
+"If she approves of the plan I'll come to work next week."
+
+"Make it two weeks, so that there'll be plenty of time to arrange
+matters, and I will expect you," the merchant replied in a tone which
+showed that he was more than satisfied with the arrangement. "I only
+came over to see if you needed any assistance; but Mr. Harvey says
+you'll soon be free from the charge your uncle made, therefore I will go
+back at once."
+
+About an hour after the merchant departed Sam and the constables
+returned with Phil and the stolen goods.
+
+The amateur detective was in the best possible spirits, and now that the
+burglar had been apprehended through his assistance the boy felt
+absolutely certain he was the greatest detective in the country.
+
+As a matter of course, there was nothing the 'Squire could do save
+discharge Hazelton from custody, and after Mr. Harvey had given his word
+that he would take care Sam should appear when wanted as a witness, the
+boy rejoined his friends, saying as he did so:
+
+"If you fellers had done as I wanted you'd be way up now, the same as I
+am. Of course, I don't blame you for being afraid; but when you go out
+on such work the only way is to hold on."
+
+"I wonder how long you'd have held on if the men hadn't made you stay
+with them?" Dan asked.
+
+"Who told you that?" Sam said. "If I staid, it was because I knowed it
+wouldn't be long until I got the upper hand of the gang, an I've done
+it."
+
+Before the party separated, and while Uncle Nathan was identifying the
+goods which had been stolen from him, Mr. Harvey insisted that the
+reward should be paid, and although it was very much like drawing a
+tooth, the old man was finally induced to make his word good.
+
+"It's a pile of money, but I earned it," Sam said, as he tucked Uncle
+Nathan's grudgingly bestowed cash in his trousers pocket. "There ain't
+many 'round this part of the country who could have done what I did, an'
+it's only right detectives should be well paid."
+
+Then, with many protestations of friendship, the lawyer started for
+home, after returning to Hazelton the money which Teddy had given Mr.
+Reaves for safekeeping, and the fakir said as he walked out of the
+court-room with the four boys:
+
+"Now, I want you to come with me, until my business is settled, and then
+I'll shake the dust of Peach Bottom from my feet in the shortest
+possible time."
+
+Not understanding what he meant, the boys accompanied him to the nearest
+jewelry store, and there he bought two silver watches, which he
+presented to Teddy and Dan, as he said:
+
+"These are only to remind you that I am grateful for what has been done.
+It isn't much of a present; but it will suffice to show I'm not
+ungrateful. Some time in the future I may meet you again, and then the
+full debt shall be paid if I'm solid enough to do it."
+
+He was gone almost before the astonished boys could thank him, and with
+his departure this story should properly be concluded, since Teddy has
+made his last appearance as a fakir.
+
+A few more words, and "the end" shall be written.
+
+Sam, still believing himself especially designed for a detective, is yet
+displaying his "style" as an oarsman in the employ of the Davis Boat and
+Oar Company, and he believes he has guessed the weight of the yacht
+which is so soon to be given away.
+
+Dan accepted an offer from Mr. Reaves last week, and he and Teddy are
+learning the same business, both looking forward to the time when they
+shall own a store equally as large.
+
+Uncle Nathan is still at the Run, but his trade has decreased very
+materially, and Hazelton has not been seen since the day he left Peach
+Bottom; but it is quite possible that when the fair opens this season
+all the fakirs may again meet the country boy who made such a successful
+venture at the country fair.
+
+
+ [THE END.]
+
+
+
+[Illustration: 53 STATE ST.
+ 19 KILBY ST.]
+
+
+CHARLES E. BROWN & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS, BOSTON.
+
+RIDPATH'S UNITED STATES.
+
+Cloth 3.75 Sheep 5.00 Half Morocco 6.00
+
+Size of Volumes 7-1/2 x 10-1/4 Inches.
+
+
+[Illustration: THE UNITED STATES A HISTORY
+JOHN CLARK RIDPATH L.L.D.]
+
+_Fac-simile Volume Reduced._
+
+FOR SALE BY ALL BOOKSELLERS OR SENT UPON RECEIPT OF PRICE BY THE
+PUBLISHERS.
+
+
+CHARLES E. BROWN & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS BOSTON.
+
+HALL'S IRELAND, 3 VOLS. IN 1.
+
+Cloth 3.75 Sheep 5.00 Half Morocco 6.00
+
+Size of Volumes 7 1/2 x 10 1/4 Inches.
+
+
+[Illustration: IRELAND ITS HISTORY SCENERY AND PEOPLE]
+
+_Fac-simile Volume Reduced._
+
+FOR SALE BY ALL BOOKSELLERS OR SENT UPON RECEIPT OF PRICE BY THE
+PUBLISHERS.
+
+
+CHARLES E. BROWN & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS, BOSTON.
+
+MISS PARLOA'S COOK BOOK.
+
+Cloth, silver and black Side and Back 1.25
+
+Size of Volumes 5-1/4 x 7-3/4 Inches.
+
+
+[Illustration: MISS PARLOA'S COOK BOOK]
+
+_Fac-simile Volume Reduced._
+
+
+FOR SALE BY ALL BOOKSELLERS OR SENT UPON RECEIPT OF PRICE BY THE
+PUBLISHERS.
+
+
+
+
+ * * * * *
+
+
+
+
+Transcriber's Note:
+
+[----] denotes a word missing in the original text.
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ADVENTURES OF A COUNTRY BOY AT A
+COUNTRY FAIR***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 37647.txt or 37647.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/3/7/6/4/37647
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://www.gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
+paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works. See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+ the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+ you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
+ owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+ has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+ Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
+ must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+ prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+ returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+ sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+ address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+ the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+ you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+ does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+ License. You must require such a user to return or
+ destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+ and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+ Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+ money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+ electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+ of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+ distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+ Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+ Chief Executive and Director
+ gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit:
+http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+ http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+